The Bmw 6 Series Convertible. Owner's Manual

Owner's Manual Contents for Vehicle A-Z The Ultimate Driving Machine®

THE BMW 6 SERIES CONVERTIBLE. OWNER'S MANUAL.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15

6 Series Owner's Manual for Vehicle Thank you for choosing a BMW. The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest: Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW. Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐ tains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐ hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW. Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the printed or Integrated Owner's Manual are found in the appendix of the printed Quick Reference for the vehicle. Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐ chures in the onboard literature. We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride. BMW AG

The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app. Additional information on the Internet: www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 © 2015 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English II/15, 03 15 490 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Addendum

ADDENDUM TO OWNER'S MANUAL We wanted to provide you with some updates we recommend that you make sure that any and clarifications with respect to the printed such parts and/or accessories are appropri- BMW Owner's Manual. These updates and ate for use on your vehicle. clarifications will supersede the materials con- 4. At page 7, under the warranty section's dis- tained in that document. cussion of homologation, where it states 1. Where the terms “service center,” “the ser- that you “cannot lodge warranty claims for vice center,” “your service center,” “service your vehicle there,” the text should read specialist,” or “service” are used in the that you “may not be able to lodge warranty Owner's Manual, we wanted to clarify that claims for your vehicle there.” the terms refer to a BMW dealer's service 5. At page 7, under the “Parts and accesso- center or another service center or repair ries” section, in the sixth sentence, the shop that employs trained personnel that word “cannot” should read “does not.” can perform maintenance and repair work 6. At page 60, in the “Check and replace on your vehicle in accordance with BMW safety belts” section, the text beginning, specifications. “This should only be done by your service 2. Where the text of the Owner's Manual con- center …” should be disregarded and the tains an affirmative instruction to contact a following text should be read in lieu thereof: “service center” or “your service center,” “BMW recommends having this work per- we wanted to clarify that BMW recom- formed by a service center as it is important mends that, if you are faced with one of the that this safety feature functions properly.” situations addressed by that text, you con- 7. At page 60, under the heading: “Active tact or seek the assistance of a BMW head restraint,” the paragraph beginning, dealer's service center or another service “Only attach accessories …” should be dis- center or repair shop that employs trained regarded and the following text should be personnel that can perform maintenance read in lieu thereof: “BMW recommends and repair work on your vehicle in accor- that you attach accessories approved by dance with BMW specifications. BMW to the seat or head restraint.” While BMW of North America LLC, at no 8. At page 101, under the heading: “Special cost to you, will pay for repairs required by windshield,” the paragraph beginning, the limited warranties provided with respect “Therefore, have the special windshield …” to your vehicle and for maintenance under should be disregarded and the following the Maintenance Program during the appli- text should be read in lieu thereof: “BMW cable warranty and maintenance coverage recommends that you have the special periods, you are free to elect, both during windshield replaced by the service center.” those periods and thereafter, to have maintenance and repair work provided by other 9. At page 110, under the heading: “Hints,” service centers or repair shops. the sentence beginning, “Only have the airbags checked …” should be disregarded 3. Where the Owner's Manual makes refer- and the following language should be read ence to parts and accessories having been in lieu thereof: “The manufacturer of your approved by BMW, those references are vehicle strongly suggests that you have air- intended to reflect that those parts and bags checked, repaired or dismantled and accessories are recommended by BMW of the system scrapped by your service center North America LLC. You may elect to use other parts and accessories, but, if you do,

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Addendum

or an authorized repair shop for handling should be disregarded and in lieu thereof, explosives.” the term “Recommended” should be read 10. At page 110, in the “Triggered rollover pro- in its place. In addition, the text of that sec- tection system” section, the sentence tion should be disregarded and the follow- beginning, “Have this work performed only ing text should be read in lieu thereof: by our service center …” should be disre- The manufacturer of your vehicle strongly garded and the following text should be suggests that you use wheels and tires that read in lieu thereof: “BMW recommends have been recommended by the vehicle having this work performed by a service manufacturer for your vehicle type; other- center as it is important that this safety fea- wise, for example, despite having the same ture functions properly.” official size ratings, variations can lead to 11. At page 182 under the heading: “Objects body contact and with it, the risk of severe within the range of movement of the ped- accidents. als” and at page 235 under the heading: The manufacturer of your vehicle does not “Carpets and floor mats,” the paragraph evaluate non-recommended wheels and that begins: “Only use floor mats …” should tires to determine if they are suitable for use be disregarded and the following language on your vehicle. should be read in lieu thereof: “The manu- 16. At page 211, under the heading: “Snow facturer of your vehicle recommends that Chains,” the text should be disregarded and you use floor mats that have been identified the following text should be read in lieu by it as appropriate for use in your vehicle thereof: and that can be properly fixed in place.” Only certain types of fine-link snow chains 12. At page 186, under the heading: “Have have been tested by the manufacturer of maintenance carried out,” the sentence your vehicle and are determined by the beginning, “The maintenance should be manufacturer of your vehicle to be road safe carried out …” should be disregarded and and are recommended by the manufacturer the following text should be read in lieu of your vehicle. thereof: “BMW recommends that you have Information about recommended snow the maintenance carried out by your service chains is available from a service center. center.” 17. At page 213, under the heading “Hood,” the 13. At page 198, under the heading “Tire infla- sentence beginning, “If you are unfamiliar” tion specifications,” the sentence begin- should be disregarded. ning, “Tire inflation pressure specifications apply to approved tire sizes …” should be 18. At page 217, under the heading: “Engine oil disregarded. change,” the text should be disregarded and in lieu thereof should be read as follows: 14. At page 206, under the heading: “Mount- ing,” the paragraph beginning, “Have BMW recommends that you have the oil mounting and balancing …” should be dis- changed at your BMW dealer's service cen- regarded and the following text should be ter or at another service center that has read in lieu thereof: “BMW recommends trained personnel that can perform the work that you have mounting and balancing per- in accordance with BMW specifications. formed by your service center or a tire 19. At page 220, under the heading: “Service mounting specialist.” and Warranty Information Booklet for US 15. At page 207, under the heading: “Approved models and Warranty and Service Guide wheels and tires,” the term “Approved” Booklet for Canadian models,” the second

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Addendum

paragraph should be disregarded and the following text read in lieu thereof: The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you have maintenance and repair performed by your BMW dealer's service center or another service center or repair shop that employs trained personnel that can perform maintenance and repair work on your vehicle in accordance with BMW specifications. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you maintain records of all maintenance and repair work performed on your vehicle. 20. At page 225, under the “Battery replacement” section, the text should be disregarded and in lieu thereof the following text should be read: Use of recommended vehicle batteries The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you use vehicle batteries that it has tested and recommends for use in your vehicle; otherwise the vehicle could be damaged and systems or functions may not be fully available. After a battery replacement, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you have the battery registered on your vehicle by a service center to ensure that all comfort functions are fully available, and that any “check control” messages of these comfort functions are no longer displayed.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15

Contents

The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ Mobility ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to 194 Refueling page 244. 196 Fuel 198 Wheels and tires 213 Engine compartment 6 Notes 215 Engine oil At a glance 218 Coolant 14 Cockpit 220 Maintenance 18 iDrive 222 Replacing components 26 Voice activation system 227 Breakdown assistance 29 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 232 Care

Controls Reference 34 Opening and closing 240 Technical data 56 Adjusting 244 Everything from A to Z 66 Transporting children safely 69 Driving 83 Displays 102 Lights 107 Safety 134 Driving stability control systems 142 Driving comfort 163 Climate control 170 Interior equipment 175 Storage compartments

Driving tips 180 Things to remember when driving 183 Loading 185 Saving fuel

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 6

Notes

Using this Owner's Manual Symbols Indicates precautions that must be followed Orientation precisely in order to avoid the possibility of The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ personal injury and serious damage to the ular topic is by using the index. vehicle. An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in ◄ Marks the end of a specific item of the first chapter. information. Refers to measures that can be taken to Updates made after the editorial help protect the environment. deadline "..." Identifies display texts in vehicle used to Any updates made after the editorial deadline select individual functions. for the Owner's Manuals are found in the ap‐ pendix of the printed Quick Reference for the ›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice vehicle. activation system. ››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the User's manual for Navigation, voice activation system. Entertainment, Communication The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ Symbols on vehicle components munication and the short commands of the Indicates that you should consult the voice activation system are described in a sep‐ relevant section of this Owner's Manual for arate user's manual, which is also included information on a particular part or assembly. with the onboard literature.

Vehicle features and options Additional sources of This Owner's Manual describes all models and information all standard, country-specific and optional The service center will be happy to answer any equipment that is offered in the model series. other questions you may have. Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, we also de‐ scribe and illustrate features that are not avail‐ Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is able in your vehicle, e.g., because of the se‐ available on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com. lected optional features or the country-specific BMW Driver’s Guide App version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The Owner's Manual is available in many coun‐ The respectively applicable country provisions tries as an app. Additional information on the must be observed when using the respective Internet: features and systems. www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide For any options and equipment not described in this Owner's Handbook, refer to the Supple‐ mentary Owner's Handbooks.

6 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 7

Notes

On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls Therefore, have this work performed only by a are arranged differently from what is shown in BMW center or a workshop that works accord‐ the illustrations. ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐ ately trained personnel. If work is not carried out properly, there is a Status of the Owner's danger of subsequent damage and related Manual safety hazards.

Basic information Parts and accessories The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a BMW recommends using parts and accesso‐ policy of constant development that is con‐ ries approved by BMW for this purpose. ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to Your BMW center is the right contact for genu‐ embody the highest quality and safety stan‐ ine BMW parts and accessories, other prod‐ dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐ ucts approved by BMW and related qualified scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from advice. those in your vehicle. BMW has tested these products for safety and suitability in relation to BMW vehicles. Updates made after the editorial deadline BMW can assume responsibility for them. However, we cannot assume any responsibility Any updates made after the editorial deadline whatsoever for parts and accessories that have for the Owner's Manuals are found in the ap‐ not been specifically approved by BMW. pendix of the printed Quick Reference for the vehicle. BMW cannot evaluate whether each individual product from another manufacturer can be used with BMW vehicles without presenting a For your own safety safety hazard. This guarantee does not apply when country-specific government approval Warranty has been granted. Testing of this kind may fail to embrace the entire range of potential oper‐ Your vehicle is technically configured for the ating conditions to which components might operating conditions and registration require‐ be exposed on BMW vehicles. Such products ments applying in the country of first delivery - could conceivably fail to comply with BMW's homologation. If your vehicle is to be operated own stringent quality standards. in a different country it might be necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing oper‐ California Proposition 65 Warning ating conditions and permit requirements. If California laws require us to state the following your vehicle does not comply with the homolo‐ warning: gation requirements in a certain country you cannot lodge warranty claims for your vehicle Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐ there. Further information can be obtained bile components and parts, including compo‐ from your Service Centre. nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐ cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the Maintenance and repairs State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain materials and high-performance electronics, products of component wear contain or emit requires suitable maintenance and repair work.

7 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 8

Notes

chemicals known to the State of California to Specifications for required maintenance meas‐ cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ ures: ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐ ▷ BMW Maintenance system lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐ ▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used for US models engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect ▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and Canadian models water. If the vehicle is not maintained according to these specifications, this could result in seri‐ Service and warranty ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is We recommend that you read this publication not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐ Warranty. lowing warranties: ▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Data memory ▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty. ▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐ Many electronic components on your vehicle ranty. are equipped with data memories that tempo‐ rarily or permanently store technical informa‐ ▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty. tion about the condition of the vehicle, events ▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐ and faults. This technical information generally ited Warranty. records the state of a component, a module, a Detailed information about these warranties is system or the environment: listed in the Service and Warranty Information ▷ Operating mode of system components, fill Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and levels for instance. Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. ▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and its individual components, e.g., wheel rota‐ designed to meet the particular operating con‐ tion speed/vehicle speed, deceleration, ditions and homologation requirements in your transverse acceleration. country and continental region in order to de‐ ▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐ liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle tem components, e.g., lights and brakes. is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or ▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐ region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐ tions such as airbag deployment or engag‐ hicle to meet different prevailing operating ing the stability control system. conditions and homologation requirements. ▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature. You should also be aware of any applicable This data is purely technical in nature and is warranty limitations or exclusions for such used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐ country or region. In such case, please contact mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over Customer Relations for further information. routes traveled cannot be created from this data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐ Maintenance pair services, service processes, warranty Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the claims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐ road safety, operational reliability and the New mation can be read out from the event and Vehicle Limited Warranty. fault memories by the service personnel, in‐

8 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 9

Notes

cluding the manufacturer, using special diag‐ conditions and no personal data, e.g., name, nostic tools. You can obtain further information gender, age, and crash location, are recorded. there if you need it. After an error is corrected, However, other parties, such as law enforce‐ the information in the fault memory is deleted ment, could combine the EDR data with the or overwritten on a continuous basis. type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐ With the vehicle in use there are situations quired during a crash investigation. where you can associate these technical data To read data recorded by an EDR, special with individuals if combined with other infor‐ equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐ mation, e.g., an accident report, damage to the cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐ vehicle, eye witness accounts — possibly with hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law the assistance of an expert. enforcement, that have the special equipment, Additional functions that are contractually can read the information if they have access to agreed with the customer - such as vehicle the vehicle or the EDR. emergency locating - you can transmit certain vehicle data from the vehicle. Vehicle identification number Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐ corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐ tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐ standing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or The vehicle identification number can be found less. in the engine compartment. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: The vehicle identification number can also be ▷ How various systems in your vehicle were found behind the windshield. operating. ▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were fastened. Reporting safety defects ▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing For US customers the accelerator and/or brake pedal. The following only applies to vehicles owned ▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling. and operated in the US. These data can help provide a better under‐ If you believe that your vehicle has a defect standing of the circumstances in which which could cause a crash or could cause in‐ crashes and injuries occur. jury or death, you should immediately inform EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐ nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of recorded by the EDR under normal driving North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐

9 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 10

Notes

wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of North America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐ ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐ formation about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐ fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.

10 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 11

Notes

11 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 At a glance

These overviews of buttons, switches and displays are intended to familiarize you with your vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted with the available control concepts and options.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 14

At a glance Cockpit

Cockpit

Vehicle features and options the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and This chapter describes all standard, country- systems. The respectively applicable country specific and optional features offered with the provisions must be observed when using the series. It also describes features that are not respective features and systems. necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to

All around the steering wheel

1 Opening and closing the rear win‐ Lane departure warning 129 dow 47 2 Open and close side windows and rear Night Vision 125 window together 46 3 Power windows 46 Head-up Display 99 4 Exterior mirror operation 63 5 Driver assistance systems Active Blind Spot Detec‐ 6 Lights tion 130

Intelligent Safety 116

14 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 15

Cockpit At a glance

Front fog lights 105 Reduce distance 142

Parking lights 102 Increase distance 142

Low beams 102 Cruise control rocker switch 149, 142 10 Instrument cluster 83 Automatic headlight con‐ 11 Steering wheel buttons, right trol 103 Entertainment source Daytime running lights 103 High-beam Assistant 104 Volume Instrument lighting 105

Voice activation 26 7 Steering column stalk, left Turn signal 75 Telephone, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and High beams, head‐ Communication light flasher 75 Thumbwheel for selection lists 95

High-beam Assistant 104 12 Steering column stalk, right Wiper 76

Roadside parking lights 103 Rain sensor 76

On-board computer 96 Clean the windshields and head‐ lights 77 8 Shift paddles 80 9 Steering wheel buttons, left 13 Start/stop the engine and switch the ignition on/off 70 Store speed 149, 142 14 Auto Start/Stop function 71 Resume speed 149, 142

15 Horn, total area Cruise control on/off, inter‐ 16 Steering wheel heating 65 rupt 142

Cruise control on/off, inter‐ rupt 149 17 Adjust the steering wheel 65

18 Unlocking the hood

15 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 16

At a glance Cockpit

19 Open trunk lid 41

All around the center console

1 Control Display 18 8 Parking brake 72 2 Glove compartment 175 3 Ventilation 167 Automatic Hold 73 4 Hazard warning system 227

9 Opening and closing the Central locking system 40 convertible top 49

10 PDC Park Distance Control 151 5 Radio/CD/Multimedia, see user's manual Top View 157 for Navigation, Entertainment and Commu‐ nication Rearview camera 153 6 Automatic climate control 163 Parking assistant 159 7 Controller with buttons 18 Side View 156

HDC Hill Descent Control 136

16 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 17

Cockpit At a glance

11 Driving Dynamics Control 138 12 Transmission selector lever

DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ trol 134

All around the interior rearview mirror

1 Intelligent Emergency Re‐ 3 Interior lights 105 quest 227

2 Reading lights 106 4 Indicator lamp, front-seat pas‐ senger airbag 109

17 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 18

At a glance iDrive

iDrive

Vehicle features and options Control Display This chapter describes all standard, country- Hints specific and optional features offered with the ▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the series. It also describes features that are not care instructions. necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This ▷ Do not place objects close to the Control also applies to safety-related functions and Display; otherwise, the Control Display can systems. The respectively applicable country be damaged. provisions must be observed when using the ▷ In the case of very high temperatures on respective features and systems. the Control Display, e.g. due to intense so‐ lar radiation, the brightness may be re‐ duced down to complete deactivation. The concept Once the temperature is reduced, e.g. through shadow or climate control system, The iDrive combines the functions of many the normal functions are re-established. switches. Thus, these functions can be oper‐ ated from a central location. Switching on Using the iDrive during a trip 1. Switch on the ignition. To avoid becoming distracted and pos‐ 2. Press the controller. ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occupants and to other traffic, never attempt Switch off to use the controls or enter information unless traffic and road conditions allow it.◀ 1. Press button. 2. "Turn off control display" Control elements at a glance

Control elements

Controller The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The controller can be used to select 1 Control Display menu items and enter the settings. 2 Controller with buttons and, depending on Some iDrive functions can be operated using the equipment version, with touchpad the touchpad on the controller.

18 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 19

iDrive At a glance

1. Turn. Press button Function

BACK Displays the previous panel.

OPTION Opens the Options menu.

Operating concept

Opening the main menu Press button. 2. Press.

3. Move in four directions. The main menu is displayed. All iDrive functions can be called up via the main menu.

Selecting menu items Highlighted menu items can be selected.

1. Turn the controller until the desired menu item is highlighted.

Buttons on controller

Press button Function

MENU Open the main menu.

RADIO Opens the Radio menu.

MEDIA Opens the Multimedia menu. 2. Press the controller. NAV Opens the Navigation menu.

TEL Opens the phone menu.

19 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 20

At a glance iDrive

Menu items in the Owner's Manual In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be selected are set in quotation marks, e.g., "Settings".

Changing between panels After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap. ▷ Move the controller to the left. Additional options: move the controller to the Closes current display and shows previous right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is display. displayed. Reopens previous display by pressing BACK button. In this case, the current Options menu panel is not closed. The "Options" menu consists of various areas: ▷ Move the controller to the right. ▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen". Opens new display on top of previous This area remains unchanged. screen. ▷ Control options for the selected main menu, e.g., for "Radio". ▷ If applicable, further operating options for the selected menu, e.g., "Store station".

Changing settings 1. Select a field. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is displayed.

White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐ cate that additional panels can be opened.

Display of an opened menu When selecting a menu, it generally opens with the panel that was last selected in that menu. To display the first panel of a menu: ▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly until the first panel is displayed. 3. Press the controller. ▷ Press the menu button on the controller twice. Activating/deactivating the functions Opening the Options menu Several menu items are preceded by a check‐ box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐ Press button. vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function. The "Options" menu is displayed. Function is activated.

20 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 21

iDrive At a glance

Function is deactivated. ▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right in the lower area of the touchpad.

Touchpad Using interactive map and Internet Via touch-pad move the interactive map in the Some iDrive functions can be operated using navigation system and Internet sites. the touchpad on the controller: Function Controls Selecting functions Move interactive map or Swipe into re‐ 1. "Settings" Internet sites. spective direc‐ 2. "Touchpad" tion. 3. Select the desired function. Enlarge/shrink interactive Drag in or out on ▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers. map or Internet sites. the touchpad with ▷ "Interactive map": viewing the interac‐ fingers. tive map. Display the menu or open Tap once. ▷ "Browser": enter Internet addresses. a link in the Internet. ▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered letters and numbers. Changing settings Entering letters and numbers You may change control display settings via touchpad. Swipe left or right accordingly. Entering letters requires some practice at the beginning. When entering, pay attention to the following: Example: setting the clock ▷ For the input of upper/lower case letters and numbers, it may be necessary to reel Setting the clock via the controller to the corresponding In‐ On the Control Display: put mode, refer to page 24, e.g. when the spelling of upper and lower case letters is identical. 1. Press button. The main menu is dis‐ played. ▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on the Control Display. 2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐ lighted, and then press the controller. ▷ Always enter associated characters, such as accents or periods so that the letter can be clearly recognized. Possible input de‐ pends on the set language. Where neces‐ sary, enter special characters via the con‐ troller. ▷ To delete a character, slide to the left on the touchpad. ▷ To enter a blank space, slide to the right in the center of the touchpad. 3. If necessary, move the controller to the left ▷ To enter a hyphen, slide to the right in the to display "Time/Date". upper area of the touchpad.

21 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 22

At a glance iDrive

4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is Radio symbols highlighted, and then press the controller. Symbol Meaning

HD Radio station is being received.

Satellite radio is switched on.

Telephone symbols

Symbol Meaning

Incoming or outgoing call. 5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐ lighted, and then press the controller. Missed call.

Wireless network reception strength. Symbol flashes: network search.

Wireless network is not available.

Bluetooth is switched on.

Roaming is active.

Text message was received. 6. Turn the controller to set the hours and press the controller. Check the SIM card.

7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and SIM card is blocked. press the controller. SIM card is missing.

Status information Enter PIN.

Status field Entertainment symbols The following information is displayed in the Symbol Meaning status field at the top right: ▷ Time. CD/DVD player. ▷ Current entertainment source. Music collection. ▷ Sound output, on/off. Gracenote® database. ▷ Wireless network reception strength. AUX-IN port. ▷ Phone status. ▷ Traffic bulletin reception. USB audio interface. Mobile phone audio interface. Status field symbols The symbols are grouped as follows.

22 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 23

iDrive At a glance

Additional symbols Programmable memory buttons Symbol Meaning

Spoken instructions are turned off. General information The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐ grammable memory buttons and called up di‐ Split screen rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐ tions, phone numbers and menu entries. General information Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. Additional information can be displayed on the right side of the split screen, e.g., information Saving a function from the on-board comupter. 1. Highlight the function via the iDrive. In the divided screen view, the so-called split screen, this information remains visible even 2. Press and hold the desired button, when you change to another menu. until a signal sounds. Switching the split screen on and off Running a function On the Control Display: Press button.

1. Press button. The function will work immediately. This means, e.g., that the number is dialed 2. "Split screen" when a phone number is selected. Selecting the display On the Control Display: Displaying the button assignment Touch buttons with bare fingers. Do not wear gloves or use objects. 1. Press button. The key assignment is displayed at top edge of 2. "Split screen" screen. 3. Move the controller until the split screen is selected. 4. Press the controller or select "Split screen content". 5. Select the desired menu item.

Deleting the button assignments 1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for approx. five seconds. 2. "OK"

23 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 24

At a glance iDrive

Deleting personal in the Entering letters and numbers vehicle General information The concept On the Control Display: Depending on the usage, the vehicle saves 1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐ personal data, such as stored radio stations. bers. These personal data can be permanently de‐ 2. Select additional letters or numbers if leted through iDrive. needed. General information 3. "OK": confirm the entry. Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐ lowing data can be deleted: Symbol Function ▷ Personal Profile settings. Press the controller: delete the let‐ ▷ Stored radio stations. ter or number. ▷ Stored Favorites buttons. Press the controller for an extended ▷ Travel and computer information. period: delete all letters or numbers. ▷ Music collection. ▷ Navigation, e.g. stored destinations. Switching between cases, letters and numbers ▷ Phone book. Depending on the menu, you can reel between ▷ Online data, e.g. Favorites, cookies. entering upper and lower case, letters and ▷ Voice notes. numbers: ▷ Login accounts. Symbol Function ▷ RemoteApp smartphone tethering. Enter the letters. Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up to 30 minutes. Enter the numbers.

or Tip controller up. Functional requirement Data can only be deleted while stationary. Without navigation system Deleting data Select the symbol. Heed and follow the instructions on the Con‐ trol Display. Entry comparison Entering names and addresses: choice is nar‐ 1. Switch on the ignition. rowed down with every letter entered and let‐ 2. "Settings" ters may be added automatically. 3. Open "Options". Entries are continuously compared with data 4. "Delete personal data" stored in the vehicle. 5. "Continue" ▷ Only those letters are offered during input for which data is available. 6. "OK"

24 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 25

iDrive At a glance

▷ Target search: names of locations may be entered in languages available through Control Display.

25 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 26

At a glance Voice activation system

Voice activation system

Vehicle features and options Using voice activation This chapter describes all standard, country- Activating the voice activation system specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not 1. Press button on the steering necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to wheel. the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and 2. Wait for the signal. systems. The respectively applicable country 3. Say the command. provisions must be observed when using the A command that is recognized by the voice respective features and systems. activation system is announced and dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐ The concept cates that the voice activation system is active. ▷ Most functions displayed on the Control If no other commands are available, use func‐ Display can be operated by voice com‐ tion via iDrive. mands via the voice activation system. The system supports you with announcements Terminating the voice activation during input. system ▷ Functions that can only be used when the Briefly press the button on the steer‐ vehicle is stationary cannot be used via the ing wheel or ›Cancel‹. voice activation system. ▷ The system uses a special microphone on the driver's side. Possible commands ▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's Manual to use with the voice activation Most menu items on the Control Display can system. be voiced as commands. The available commands depend on the menu that is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐ Requirements play. Via the Control Display, set a language that is There are short commands for many functions. also supported by the voice activation system You may select lists such as phone lists via so that the spoken commands can be identi‐ voice activation. Read these lists out loud ex‐ fied. actly as they show in the respective list. Set the language, refer to page 99. Having possible commands read aloud You can have available commands read out loud for you: ›Voice commands‹ E. g. if the "Settings" menu is displayed, the commands for the settings are read out loud.

26 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 27

Voice activation system At a glance

Executing functions using short commands 2. Press button on the steering wheel. Execute functions on the main menu via short commands. It almost doesn't matter which 3. ›Tone‹ menu item is selected, e.g., ›Vehicle status‹. List of short commands for the voice activation system, see Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ Setting the voice dialog munication Owner's Manual. Set system to standard dialog or use a short version. Help dialog for the voice activation The short version of the voice dialog plays system back short messages in abbreviated form. Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹ 1. "Settings" Additional commands for the help dialog: 2. "Language/Units" ▷ ›Help with examples‹: announces informa‐ tion about the current operating options 3. "Speech type:" and the most important commands for 4. Select setting. them. ▷ ›Help with voice activation‹: information about the principle of operation for the voice activation system is announced.

One example: open the tone settings

Via the main menu The commands of the menu items are spoken just as they are selected via the controller. Adjusting the volume 1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output if Turn the volume button while giving an in‐ needed. struction until the desired volume is set. ▷ The volume remains constant even if the 2. Press button on the steering volume of other audio sources is changed. wheel. ▷ The volume is stored for the profile cur‐ 3. ›Radio‹ rently in use. 4. ›Tone‹

Via short command Hints on Emergency The desired tone settings can also be started Requests via a short command. Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐ 1. Turn on the Entertainment sound output if tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐ needed. tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.

27 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 28

At a glance Voice activation system

This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐ ment of a phone connection. Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 227, close to the interior mirror.

Environmental conditions ▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐ sis, and speed. ▷ Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system. ▷ Keep the doors, windows, and convertible top closed to prevent noise interference. ▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking.

28 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 29

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

Vehicle features and options Select components

This chapter describes all standard, country- 1. Press button. specific and optional features offered with the 2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle info". series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to 3. Press the controller. the selected options or country versions. This 4. Selecting desired range: also applies to safety-related functions and ▷ "Quick reference" systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the ▷ "Search by pictures" respective features and systems. ▷ "Owner's Manual"

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐ played on the Control Display. It specifically describes features and functions found in the vehicle.

Components of the Integrated Leafing through the Owner's Manual Owner's Manual The Integrated Owner's Manual consists of Page by page with link access three parts, which offer various levels of infor‐ Turn the controller until the next or previous mation or possible access. page is displayed. Quick Reference Guide Page by page without link access The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐ Scroll through the pages directly while skip‐ tion how to operate the car, how to use basic ping the links. vehicle functions or what to do in case of a breakdown. This information can also be dis‐ Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press played while driving. the controller to browse from page to page. Scroll back. Search by images Image search provides information and de‐ scriptions. This is helpful when the terminol‐ Scroll forward. ogy for a feature is not at hand.

Owner's Manual Search for information and descriptions by en‐ tering terms selected from the index.

29 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 30

At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

Context help - Owner's Manual to the Programmable memory buttons temporarily selected function You may open the relevant information di‐ General information rectly. The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐ grammable memory buttons and called up di‐ Opening via the iDrive rectly. To move directly from the application on the Control Display to the Options menu: Storing 1. "Owner's Manual" Select via the iDrive. 1. Press button or move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" 2. Press selected button for more menu is displayed. than 2 seconds. 2. "Display Owner's Manual" Executing Opening when a Check Control Press button. message is displayed The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐ Directly from the Check Control message on mediately. the Control Display: "Display Owner's Manual"

Changing between a function and the Owner's Manual To reel from a function, e. g., radio, to the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to alternate between the two displays:

1. Press button or move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed. 2. "Display Owner's Manual" 3. Select the desired page in the Owner's Manual.

4. Press button again to return to last displayed function.

5. Press button to return to the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last. To alternate permanently between the last dis‐ played function and the Owner's Manual re‐ peat steps 4 & 5. Opens a new display every time.

30 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 31

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance

31 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Controls

This chapter is intended to provide you with information that will give you complete control of your vehicle. All features and accessories that are useful for driving and your safety, comfort and convenience are described here.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 34

Controls Opening and closing

Opening and closing

Vehicle features and options Overview This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. 1 Unlocking 2 Locking Remote control/key 3 Opening the trunk lid General information 4 Press briefly: headlight courtesy delay fea‐ ture The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐ trols with integrated key. Press and hold: Panic mode Every remote control holds a replaceable bat‐ tery. Integrated key You may set the key functions depending on the optional features and country-specific ver‐ sion. For Settings, refer to page 43. The vehicle stores personal settings for every remote control. Personal Profile, refer to page 35. The remote controls hold information on re‐ quired maintenance. Service data in the re‐ mote control, refer to page 220 Press button, arrow 1, and remove the key, ar‐ row 2. The integrated key fits the following locks: ▷ Driver's door. ▷ Storage compartment in the center arm‐ rest.

The storage compartment contains a switch for separately securing the trunk lid, refer to page 41.

34 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 35

Opening and closing Controls

Replacing the battery ▷ Interference of radio transmission by charger while charging items such as mo‐ bile devices in the vehicle. A Check Control message is displayed if an at‐ tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start the engine.

Starting the engine with emergency detection of the remote control

1. Remove integrated key from remote con‐ trol. 2. Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1. 3. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐ ment, arrow 2. 4. Insert a battery of the same type with the positive side facing up. 5. Press the cover closed. Steptronic transmission: if a corresponding Take the used battery to a recycling Check Control message appears, hold the re‐ center or to your service center. mote control, as shown, against the marked area on the steering column and press the Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while New remote controls pressing the brake. New remote controls are available from the If the remote control is not recognized: slightly service center. change the height position of the remote con‐ trol and repeat the procedure. Loss of the remote controls Lost remote controls can be disabled by your service center. Personal Profile Emergency detection of remote The concept control Personal Profile provides three profiles, using It is possible to switch on the ignition or start which personal vehicle settings can be stored. the engine in situations such as the following: Every remote control has one of these profiles ▷ Interference of radio transmission to re‐ assigned. mote control by external sources e.g., by If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐ radio masts. trol, the assigned personal profile will be acti‐ ▷ Empty battery in remote control. vated. All settings stored in the profile are au‐ ▷ Interference from radio transmissions tomatically applied. through mobile devices in close proximity If several drivers use their own remote control, to remote control. the vehicle will adjust the personal settings during unlocking. These settings are also re‐ stored, if the vehicle has been used in the

35 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 36

Controls Opening and closing

meantime by a person with a different remote Profile management control. Changes to the settings are automatically Opening profiles saved in the personal profile. Regardless of the remote control in use a dif‐ Three personal profiles and a guest profile can ferent profile may be activated. be created. 1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" Adjusting 3. Select a profile. The settings for the following systems and functions are saved in the active profile. The ▷ All settings stored in the called-up profile scope of storable settings is country- and are automatically applied. equipment-dependable. ▷ The called-up profile is assigned to the re‐ ▷ Unlocking and locking. mote control being used at the time. ▷ Lights. ▷ If the profile is already assigned to a differ‐ ent remote control, this profile will apply to ▷ Climate control. both remote controls. It cannot be differen‐ ▷ Radio. tiated anymore between the settings for ▷ Instrument cluster. the two remote controls. ▷ Programmable memory buttons. Renaming profiles ▷ Volumes, tone. A personal name can be assigned to every pro‐ ▷ Control Display. file to avoid confusion between the profiles. ▷ Navigation. 1. "Settings" ▷ TV. 2. "Profiles" ▷ Park Distance Control PDC. 3. "Options" ▷ Rearview camera 4. "Rename current profile" ▷ Side View. ▷ Head-up Display. Resetting profiles ▷ Driving Dynamics Control. The settings of the active profile are reset to ▷ Driver's seat position, exterior mirror posi‐ their default values. tion, steering wheel position. 1. "Settings" ▷ Cruise control. 2. "Profiles" ▷ Intelligent Safety. 3. "Options" ▷ Active Blind Spot Detection. 4. "Reset current profile" ▷ Night vision. Exporting profiles Most settings of the active profile can be ex‐ ported. This can be helpful for securing and retrieving personal settings, before delivering the vehicle to a workshop, e.g. Profiles can be taken to an‐

36 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 37

Opening and closing Controls

other vehicle equipped with the Personal Pro‐ Display profile list during start file function. The profile list can be displayed during each The following export options are available: start to select the desired profile. ▷ Via BMW Online. 1. "Settings" ▷ Via the USB port to a USB device. 2. "Profiles" Popular file systems for USB devices are 3. "Options" supported. FAT32 and exFAT are the rec‐ 4. "Display user list at startup" ommended formats for profile export. Other formats may not support the export. 1. "Settings" Using the remote control 2. "Profiles" 3. "Export profile" Note 4. BMW Online: "BMW Online" Take the remote control with you USB interface: "USB device" People or animals left unattended in a parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐ Importing profiles side. Always take the remote control with you Profiles exported via BMW Online can also be when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle imported via BMW Online. can then be opened from the outside.◀ Profiles stored on a USB device can be im‐ ported via the USB interface. Unlocking Existing settings are overwritten with the im‐ Press button on the remote control. ported profile. 1. "Settings" ▷ All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap are being unlocked. 2. "Profiles" ▷ Interior lamps and courtesy lamps are acti‐ 3. "Import profile" vated. This function is not available, if the 4. BMW Online: "BMW Online" interior lamps were switched off manually. USB interface: "USB device" ▷ The welcome lamps are switched on, if this function was activated. Using the guest profile ▷ Exterior mirrors folded through convenient The guest profile is for individual settings that closing are folded open. are saved in none of the three personal pro‐ You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked. files. For Settings, refer to page 43. This can be useful for drivers who are using Anti-theft protection is switched off. the vehicle temporarily and do not have their own profile. The alarm system, refer to page 44, is dis‐ armed. 1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" Convenient opening 3. "Guest" Press and hold this button on the re‐ The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not mote control. assigned to the current remote control.

37 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 38

Controls Opening and closing

The windows and the rear window are opened, Convenient closing as long as the button on the remote control is With Comfort Access, the remote control can pressed. be used to close the convertible top, the side With Comfort Access, the remote control can windows, and the rear window when in the vi‐ be used to open the convertible top when in cinity of the vehicle. the vicinity of the vehicle. Hold down the remote control button un‐ Press and hold this button on the re‐ til the closing operation is completed. mote control until the convertible top Releasing the button or leaving the vicinity of is fully opened and the convertible top well the vehicle stops the motion. storage cover is fully closed. In this case, the convertible top and convertible Danger of jamming top well storage cover will slowly lower after a short period of time. The convertible top and Monitor the opening process to ensure the convertible top well storage cover are not that no one becomes trapped; otherwise, inju‐ locked. Press button again until the convertible ries may result.◀ top operation is completed. Leaving the vicinity of the vehicle stops the The exterior mirrors are folded in. motion. The exterior mirrors are not folded in when the In this case, the convertible top and convertible warning flashers are activated. top well storage cover will slowly lower after a short period of time. The convertible top and Monitor closing the convertible top well storage cover are not Monitor closing to ensure that no one locked. Press button again until the convertible becomes trapped.◀ top operation is completed. Switching on interior lights and Locking courtesy lights Locking from the outside Press button on the remote control with Do not lock the vehicle from the outside the vehicle locked. with people inside the car, as the vehicle can‐ not be unlocked from inside without special This function is not available, if the interior knowledge.◀ lamps were switched off manually. The driver's door must be closed. If the button is pressed again within 10 sec‐ onds after vehicle was locked, the interior mo‐ Press button on the remote control. tion sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the anti- theft warning system, refer to page 45, are All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap are turned off. After locking, wait 10 seconds be‐ being locked. fore pressing the button again. Anti-theft protection is switched on. It pre‐ vents the doors from being unlocked using the Panic mode lock buttons or the door openers. You can trigger the alarm system if you find The alarm system, refer to page 44, is armed. yourself in a dangerous situation. Press button on the remote control for at least 3 seconds.

38 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 39

Opening and closing Controls

To reel off the alarm: press any button. ▷ Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices Opening the trunk lid in direct proximity. Press button on the remote control for Do not transport the remote control together approx. 1 second. with metal objects or electronic devices. In the case of interference, the vehicle can also The trunk lid opens, regardless of whether the be unlocked and locked from the outside with‐ vehicle was previously locked or unlocked. out remote control, refer to page 40. During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available For US owners only before opening. The transmitter and receiver units comply with Depending on the features and the country part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication version, it is also possible to have door un‐ Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐ locked. Create the settings, refer to page 43. erned by the following: If the doors were not unlocked, the trunk lid is FCC ID: locked again as soon as it closes. ▷ LX8766S. Do not place the remote control in the ▷ LX8766E. cargo area ▷ LX8CAS. Take the remote control with you and do not ▷ LX8CAS2. leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐ mote control is locked inside the vehicle when ▷ MYTCAS4. the trunk lid is closed.◀ Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Switching on the headlight courtesy Rules. Operation is subject to the following delay feature two conditions: Briefly press the button on the remote ▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐ control. ference, and ▷ this device must accept any interference The duration can be set in the Control Display. received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Malfunction Any unauthorized modifications or changes to Remote control detection by the vehicle can these devices could void the user's authority to among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐ operate this equipment. lowing circumstances: ▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐ charged. Replace the battery, refer to page 35. ▷ Interference of the radio connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmit power. ▷ Shielding of the remote control due to metal objects.

39 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 40

Controls Opening and closing

Without remote control From the inside

From the outside Unlocking and locking Locking from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside with people inside the car, as the vehicle can‐ not be unlocked from inside without special knowledge.◀

Remove the key before pulling the door handle Before pulling the outside door handle, remove the key to avoid damaging the paintwork and Pressing the central locking system button the key.◀ locks or unlocks the vehicle with the doors closed.

The vehicle is not secured against theft when locking. The fuel filler flap remains unlocked. In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning system and interior lights come on.

Unlocking and opening Unlock or lock the driver's door via the door lock using the integrated key, refer to page 34. In some vehicle equipment versions, only the driver's door can be unlocked or locked via the door lock. In this case, the other doors must be unlocked or locked from the inside.

Alarm system With some country versions, the alarm system is not armed if the vehicle is locked with the ▷ Press the central locking system button to integrated key. unlock the doors together, and then pull the door handle above the armrest. In some country-specific versions, the alarm system is triggered when the vehicle is un‐ ▷ On the door to be opened, pull the door locked via the door lock. handle twice: the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it. The other In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle doors remain locked. with the remote control or switch on the igni‐ tion, if needed, through emergency detection of the remote control, refer to page 35.

40 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 41

Opening and closing Controls

Doors The trunk lid opens.

Automatic Soft Closing Closing To close the doors, push lightly. Hints It is closed automatically. Keep the closing path clear Danger of jamming Make sure that the closing path of the Make sure that the closing path of the trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may re‐ doors is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ sult.◀

Do not place the remote control in the Trunk lid cargo area Take the remote control with you and do not Opening leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐ mote control is locked inside the vehicle when During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and the trunk lid is closed.◀ up. Ensure that adequate clearance is available Closing before opening.

Opening from the outside

Recessed grips in the interior trim of the trunk lid make it easier to pull down the lid. ▷ Press on the top half of the BMW label. Locking separately ▷ Press button on the remote con‐ The trunk lid can be locked separately using trol for approx. 1 second. the switch in the center armrest. If the center As the case may be, the doors are also un‐ arm rest is locked, the trunk lid cannot be locked. Unlocking with the remote control, opened. refer to page 39. ▷ Trunk lid secured, arrow 1. The trunk lid opens. ▷ Trunk lid not secured, ar‐ The trunk lid cannot be opened if the row 2. convertible top is not fully opened or closed.

Opening from the inside Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. This With the vehicle is stationary, press secures the trunk lid and disconnects it from the button in the driver's footwell. the central locking system.

41 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 42

Controls Opening and closing

This is beneficial when the vehicle is parked ▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not using valet service. The infrared remote con‐ possible until after approx. 2 seconds. trol can be handed out without the key. ▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐ mote control is in the vehicle. Emergency unlocking Unlocking

Pull the handle inside the cargo area. The trunk lid unlocks. Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely, arrow. This corresponds with pressing the button on Comfort Access the remote control.

The concept Locking The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐ ing the remote control. All you need to do is to have the remote con‐ trol with you, such as in your pants pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the remote control when it is in close proximity or in the car's interior. Comfort Access supports the following func‐ tions: Touch the surface on the handle of a vehicle ▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle. door, arrow, with your finger for approx. 1 sec‐ ▷ Convenient closing. ond without grasping the door handle. ▷ Open the trunk lid individually. This corresponds with pressing the button on ▷ Start the engine. the remote control. To save battery power, ensure that the ignition Functional requirements and all electronic systems and/or power con‐ ▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐ sumers are turned off before locking the vehi‐ ence nearby. cle. ▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control must be located outside of the vehicle.

42 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 43

Opening and closing Controls

Convenient closing ▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐ charged. Replace the battery, refer to Monitor closing page 35. Monitor closing to ensure that no one ▷ Interference of the radio connection from becomes trapped.◀ transmission towers or other equipment with high transmit power. ▷ Shielding of the remote control due to metal objects. ▷ Interference of the radio connection from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity. Do not transport the remote control together with metal objects or electronic devices. In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock Touch the surface on the handle of a vehicle the vehicle using the buttons of the remote door, arrow, with your finger and hold it there control or using the integrated key, refer to without grasping the door handle. page 40. This corresponds to pressing and holding the remote control button.

In addition to locking, the convertible top, the Adjusting side windows, and the rear window close, and the exterior mirrors fold in. Unlocking Press the area, arrow, and hold until the The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐ convertible top is fully closed. fer to page 35.

Separately unlocking the trunk lid Doors Press on the top half of the BMW label. 1. "Settings" This corresponds to pressing the re‐ 2. "Doors/key" mote control button. 3. Select the symbol. The situation of the doors does not change. 4. Select the desired function: Do not place the remote control in the ▷ "Driver's door only" cargo area Only the driver's door and the fuel filler Take the remote control with you and do not flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐ leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐ locks the entire vehicle. mote control is locked inside the vehicle when ▷ "All doors" the trunk lid is closed.◀ The entire vehicle is unlocked.

Malfunction Remote control detection by the vehicle can among others be malfunctioning under the fol‐ lowing circumstances:

43 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 44

Controls Opening and closing

Trunk lid Retrieving the seat, mirror, and Depending on optional features and country steering wheel settings version, this setting is not offered in some The driver's seat, exterior mirror, and steering cases. wheel position adjusted last will be stored for the active profile. 1. "Settings" When the vehicle is unlocked, these positions 2. "Doors/key" are automatically retrieved if this function was 3. Select the symbol. activated. 4. Select the desired function: Pinch hazard when moving back the seat ▷ "Tailgate" If this function is used, first make sure The trunk lid is opened. that the footwell behind the driver's seat is ▷ "Tailgate + door(s)" empty. Otherwise, people might get injured or objects damaged when the seat is moved The trunk lid is opened and the doors back.◀ are unlocked. The adjustment procedure is interrupted: Confirmation signals from the vehicle ▷ When a seat position reel is pressed. The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐ ▷ When a button of the seat, mirror, and fer to page 35. steering wheel memory is pressed briefly. 1. "Settings" Activating the setting 2. "Doors/key" 1. "Settings" 3. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐ mation signals. 2. "Doors/key" ▷ "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock" 3. "Last seat position autom." ▷ "Flash when lock/unlock"

Automatic locking Alarm system The settings are saved in the active profile, re‐ The concept fer to page 35. When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm 1. "Settings" system responds to: 2. "Doors/key" ▷ Opening a door, the hood or the trunk lid. 3. Select the desired function: ▷ Movements in the interior. ▷ "Lock if no door is opened" ▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐ The vehicle locks automatically after a tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing short period of time if no door is the car. opened. ▷ Disconnected battery voltage. ▷ "Lock after start driving" The alarm system briefly signals tampering: The vehicle locks automatically after ▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm. you drive off. ▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐ tem. ▷ By flashing the daytime running lights.

44 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 45

Opening and closing Controls

Arming and disarming the alarm The doors, hood or trunk lid is not closed system properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐ When you unlock or lock the vehicle, either cured. with the remote control, Comfort Access or at After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp the door lock the alarm system is disarmed or flashes continuously. Interior motion sen‐ armed at the same time. sor and tilt alarm sensor are not active. When the still open access is closed, inte‐ Door lock and armed alarm system rior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor will Unlocking via the door lock will trigger the be switched on. alarm on some country-specific versions. ▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐ ing: Trunk lid and armed alarm system The vehicle has not been tampered with. The trunk lid can be opened even when the ▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking alarm system is armed. until the engine ignition is switched on, but After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and no longer than approx. 5 minutes: monitored again when the doors are locked. An alarm has been triggered. The hazard warning system flashes once.

Panic mode Tilt alarm sensor You can trigger the alarm system if you find The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. yourself in a dangerous situation. The alarm system responds in situations such Press button on the remote control for as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is at least 3 seconds. towed.

To switch off the alarm: press any button. Interior motion sensor The interior is monitored to the height of the Indicator lamp on the interior rearview seats. The alarm system is armed together mirror with the interior motion sensor even when the convertible top is open. Falling objects such as leaves can trigger the alarm unintentionally.

Avoiding unintentional alarms The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐ sor can be switched off together, such as in the following situations: ▷ In automatic car washes. ▷ In duplex garages. ▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every 2 seconds: ▷ During transport on trains carrying vehi‐ cles, at sea or on a trailer. The system is armed. ▷ With animals in the vehicle. ▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking:

45 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 46

Controls Opening and closing

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor Press the remote control button again within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is locked. The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐ onds and then continues to flash. The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐ sor are turned off, until the vehicle is locked again. Opening individually

Switching off the alarm ▷ Press the button to the resistance point. ▷ Unlock vehicle with the remote control or The window opens while the switch is held. switch on the ignition, if needed through emergency detection of remote control, re‐ fer to page 35. ▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐ ance point. ▷ With Comfort Access: if you are carrying the remote control on your person, grasp The window opens automatically. Pressing the driver side or front passenger side door the switch again stopse the motion. handle completely. See also: Convenient opening, refer to page 37, via remote control.

Power windows Opening together

Hints ▷ Press the button to the resistance point. Take the remote control with you All windows, including the rear window, Take the remote control with you when open while the switch is being pressed. leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐ not operate the power windows and injure ▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐ themselves.◀ ance point. Closing the windows when driving All windows, including the rear window, To close the side windows when driving, open automatically. first close the rear windows or all four windows Pressing again stops the motion. at the same time; otherwise, the windows may not close tightly at high speeds.◀ Closing individually Keep the closing path clear Monitor closing and make sure that the closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀

▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point.

46 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 47

Opening and closing Controls

The window closes while the switch is Closing held. Pull the reel.

▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance The rear window closes while the reel is point. being held. The window closes automatically. Pulling again stops the motion. Pinch protection system See also: Convenient closing, refer to page 38, Danger of jamming even with pinch pro‐ via remote control. tection See also: closing by means of Comfort Access, Even with the pinch protection system, check refer to page 42. that the window's closing path is clear; other‐ wise, the closing action may not stop in certain Closing together situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀

▷ Pull the switch to the resistance No window accessories point. Do not install any accessories in the win‐ All windows, including the rear window, are dow's range of movement; otherwise, the closed while the switch is being pressed. pinch protection system will be impaired.◀ If closing force exceeds a specific margin as a ▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance window closes, closing is interrupted. point. The window reopens slightly. All windows, including the rear window, are The rear window is not equipped with pinch closed while the switch is being pressed. protection. As soon as the rear window is closed, the side windows are automatically closed by Closing without the pinch protection pulling the switching beyond the resist‐ system ance point. Pressing the switch stops the motion. Keep the closing path clear Monitor closing and make sure that the Rear window closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ Opening E.g. danger from the outside or ice might pre‐ vent window from closing properly - proceed ▷ Press the button to the resistance as follows: point. The rear window opens while the reel is 1. Pull the reel past the resistance point and being held. hold it there. The pinch protection is limited and the ▷ Press the reel beyond the resistance window reopens slightly if the closing force point. exceeds a certain margin. The rear window opens automatically. 2. Pull the reel past the resistance point again The rear window opens and closes automati‐ within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there. cally when the convertible top is opened or The window closes without jam protection. closed.

47 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 48

Controls Opening and closing

Convertible top Overview

General information The convertible top can be opened or closed at speeds up to approx. 25 mph/40 km/h. If the vehicle is accelerated above a speed of approx. 30 mph/50 km/h while the convertible top is being moved, the convertible top move‐ ment stops.

Hints 1 Switch ▷ The trunk lid cannot be opened if the 2 LEDs convertible top is not fully opened or closed. Functional requirements ▷ If possible, close the convertible top when The ignition or radio-ready state must be the vehicle is parked. A closed convertible switched on. top protects it from weather-related dam‐ age and to some extent from theft. The following requirements must be fulfilled in order to be able to move the convertible top. ▷ Event when the convertible top is closed, only store valuables in the locked trunk. ▷ The trunk partition is flipped down. ▷ At higher speeds, vacuum produced in the ▷ The trunk lid is closed. vehicle interior causes the convertible top ▷ The external temperature is above to begin to flutter. Increase the amount of 14 ℉/-10 ℃. air via the automatic climate control so that ▷ The voltage of the vehicle electrical system no vacuum is produced in the vehicle. is sufficient. ▷ It is not possible to start the engine and ▷ The convertible top drive is not overheat‐ operate the convertible top simultane‐ ing. ously. When the engine is started using the ▷ The vehicle speed is not too high. Start/Stop button or using the Auto Start/ Stop function, the convertible top move‐ ▷ The windows can be lowered. ment is briefly interrupted. If this requirement is not met, a check control message is displayed.

Safety information Do not open convertible top at low tem‐ peratures With temperatures below +14 ℉/-10 ℃ do not open the convertible top; otherwise damages could result.◀

48 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 49

Opening and closing Controls

Allow wet convertible top to dry Observe traffic during operation Do not leave the open convertible top in When the convertible top is opened while the convertible top well longer than one day driving, be alert to traffic; otherwise, it may re‐ while the top is still wet; otherwise, damage sult in an accident. If possible, do not move the could result due to moisture.◀ convertible top while driving in reverse be‐ cause rearward vision is severely impaired Note the swivel range of the convertible while the convertible top is in motion. During top windy conditions, do not operate the The convertible top pivots up during opening convertible top while driving. and closing. When the top is moved, e.g., in Do not drive faster than 30 mph/50 km/h; oth‐ garages, make sure that there is a minimum erwise, vehicle damage may occur.◀ height of 79 inches/2 meters; otherwise, it damages may result.◀ Do not attach any roof carrier systems to the convertible top Do not place objects on the convertible Do not attach any roof carrier systems; other‐ top wise, an accident may occur.◀ Do not place any objects on the convertible top, otherwise, they could fall and cause dam‐ Do not operate convertible top on un‐ age or injuries.◀ even sections or road Do not open or close convertible top on un‐ No convertible top movement when roll‐ even sections of road. Otherwise, the vibra‐ over protection is activated tions can result in damage to the convertible Do not move the convertible top when rollover top.◀ protection is activated; otherwise, it may result in damage to the convertible top.◀ Before opening and closing Open and close convertible top com‐ ▷ Follow the safety instructions for the pletely convertible top. Always open or close the convertible top com‐ ▷ Make sure that the trunk partition in the pletely. Convertible top and convertible top trunk is folded down. well storage cover are locked in the final posi‐ ▷ Make sure that the cargo does not push tions. Driving with the convertible top or against the trunk partition from below. convertible top well storage cover unlocked can result in damage.◀ ▷ Make sure that the trunk lid is closed.

Do not reach into the convertible top Opening and closing from the inside mechanism In order to protect the battery, move the Do not reach into the convertible top mecha‐ convertible top only when the engine is run‐ nism during the opening and closing operation. ning if possible. Keep children away from the opening path of Before closing the convertible top, remove any the convertible top, otherwise, there is a risk of foreign objects from the windshield frame; oth‐ injury.◀ erwise, closing may be prevented. ▷ Press and hold the switch. The windows are rolled down, and the

49 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 50

Controls Opening and closing

convertible top opens as longs as the top well storage cover remain approx. 10 mi‐ switch is pressed. nutes in the current position before they slowly ▷ Pull the switch and hold it. The go down. If the ignition is switched off, windows are lowered, the convertible top and convertible top well stor‐ convertible top closes and the windows are age cover lower already after a short waiting raised again as long as the switch is pulled. period. Push or pull switch until the convertible top is The convertible top and the convertible top completely open or closed and the end of the well storage cover are not locked. Operate procedure is indicated by a corresponding switch again until the convertible operation is Check Control message. Always make sure terminated. that the convertible top well storage cover is completely closed. If the convertible top is Convenient operation from outside completely open or closed, convertible top and When equipped with Comfort Access the convertible top well storage cover are latched. convertible top can also be operated from out‐ side. LEDs ▷ Convenient opening, refer to page 37, via ▷ Left LED lights up green: convertible top is the remote control. opened or closed. If the operation is com‐ ▷ Convenient closing, refer to page 38, via pleted, the LED goes out and a corre‐ the remote control. sponding Check Control message is dis‐ ▷ Closing by means of Comfort Access, refer played. to page 42. ▷ Right LED flashes red after the switch is released: operating sequence has not yet Cargo area partition concluded. ▷ Right LED comes on red when the switch is pressed: trunk partition is flipped up, trunk lid is not closed or there is a malfunc‐ tion. Convertible top cannot be moved. In addition to the red LED, a check control message is displayed.

Interruption Always open/close the convertible top Fold down cargo area partition in the back so completely that the convertible top can be opened. A convertible top that is not opened or closed Fold down cargo area partition in the front in completely is not locked and represents a haz‐ order to enlarge the cargo area capacity when ard.◀ the convertible top is closed. The convertible top movement is interrupted if the switch is released. The sequence can be Manually close convertible top continued in the desired direction using the switch. Hints If there is a defect, the convertible top can be If there is a longer interruption with the ignition manually closed. Two persons are necessary switched on, convertible top and convertible to do this.

50 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 51

Opening and closing Controls

Do not manually open convertible top 4. Remove the two large lids from the trim. If and close it manually only in emergency necessary, use a screwdriver to help with situations. this. Do not manually open the convertible top. The convertible top well storage cover cannot latch if there is an electrical malfunction and would open while driving. Manually close the convertible top only in emergency situations. Damage can result from improper handling.◀

Tools 5. Unlock convertible top well storage cover. Tools for manually closing the convertible top To do this, pull on the right lid and simulta‐ are located in the insert of the rear seat back‐ neously slightly raise the front right rest under the first aid kit. convertible top well storage cover in front 1. Remove insert, refer to page 228. of the rear window. 2. Remove the first aid kit. Proceed accordingly on the left side. 3. Remove tools. 6. When the convertible top is closed man‐ ually, the trunk lid can no longer be opened. Remove urgently needed items from the trunk and close the trunk lid.

Manually lowering rear window The spindle for lowering the rear window is lo‐ cated in front of the rear window in the center beneath the convertible top well storage cover. 1 Convertible top tool 1. Have a second person slightly raise the 2 Adapter convertible top well storage cover, arrow 1, 3 Rear window tool and hold it.

Before closing 1. Switch off the ignition. 2. Lower the side window and the rear win‐ dow completely. If the rear window cannot be lowered elec‐ trically, it must be lowered manually. 3. Carefully open the trunk lid, refer to page 41, taking care not to damage the 2. Insert the rear window tool through the convertible top well storage cover. funnel-shaped opening into the spindle, ar‐

51 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 52

Controls Opening and closing

row 2. Turn the spindle clockwise, arrow 3, not to damage the convertible top fabric. until the rear window is all the way down. Remove the convertible top tool.

Lifting out convertible top Only close the convertible top with two people Carry out the following steps with the aid of a second person and with the doors open; other‐ wise, it may result in damage to the convertible top.◀ 1. Switch off the ignition. 5. On both sides of the vehicle, grasp the 2. Grasp the convertible top well storage front edge of the convertible top frame with cover on both sides, swing it up until it one hand. With the other hand, grasp the reaches its limit position and hold it in end of the convertible top on the bottom place. edge. Keep the convertible top well stor‐ age cover open, e.g., with your shoulder.

3. Remove the cover in the center of the front convertible top frame. If necessary, use a 6. Lift out the convertible top and the screwdriver to help with this. convertible top ends on both sides simul‐ taneously and swing it forward. When you do this, make sure that the convertible top ends do not push against other parts.

4. Insert the convertible top tool into the convertible top lock. Turn the convertible top tool approx. one half turn clockwise to open the convertible top lock. Be careful

52 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 53

Opening and closing Controls

7. With the cover ends placed high, close the 3. Insert the convertible top tool with the long convertible top well storage cover. end into the adapter from the onboard ve‐ hicle tool kit. 4. In the rear, raise the inner lining of the convertible top. Place the adapter on the red-marked pin of the convertible top mechanism.

8. Fold down the two convertible top ends on the convertible top well storage cover.

5. Push the rear convertible top end down and simultaneously have a second person push the tool all the way up to the stop. In this way, the convertible top end is pushed against the convertible top well storage cover and locked. Proceed accordingly on the other end of Lock convertible cover the convertible top. 1. Insert the cover tool on the front edge of the convertible top frame into the convertible top lock. 2. Turn the cover tool counterclockwise until the front convertible top frame is locked with the front windshield frame. Simultane‐ ously, have a second person push from the outside toward the center on the front windshield frame.

6. If possible, close the rear window electri‐ cally. To do this, reel on the ignition again. The rear window cannot be manually closed. 7. Have the convertible top checked by the service center.

53 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 54

Controls Opening and closing

Wind deflector 4. Install the wind deflector on the vehicle with the right retaining pin and the two rear The concept ones in the corresponding openings. The wind deflector reduces the air movement in the vehicle interior when driving with the convertible top down.

Installation 1. Remove wind deflector from the protective jacket and unfold it.

5. Push the left retaining pin into the provided opening until it latches.

2. Press the upper and lower parts together until the latch engages.

6. Flip up the top half of the wind deflector.

3. Push out the right retaining pin until the latch engages and flip out the two rear re‐ taining pins. Do not tilt the front seat backrest too far back Do not tilt the front seat backrest too far back with the wind deflector installed if the seat is to be moved all the way back. Otherwise, the wind deflector will be damaged.◀

Removing Proceed in reverse sequence.

54 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 55

Opening and closing Controls

To release the two lateral retaining pins, pull the corresponding handle forward a little and them pull it to the side.

Folding up

On the left side, pull the handle of the retaining pin on the wind deflector all the way back and release the latch. Fold in top and bottom part.

55 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 56

Controls Adjusting

Adjusting

Vehicle features and options Keep the movement area unobstructed When changing the seat position, keep This chapter describes all standard, country- the seat's area of movement unobstructed; specific and optional features offered with the otherwise, people might get injured or objects series. It also describes features that are not damaged.◀ necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and At a glance systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

Sitting safely The ideal seating position can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. The seating position plays an important role in an accident in combination with: 1 Active seat ▷ Safety belts, refer to page 59. 2 Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory ▷ Head restraints, refer to page 60. 3 Backrest width ▷ Airbags, refer to page 107. 4 Lumbar support 5 Backrest, head restraint 6 Shoulder support Seats 7 Forward/back, height, tilt Hints 8 Thigh support Do not adjust the seat while driving General information Do not adjust the driver's seat while driv‐ The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored ing, or the seat could respond with unexpected for the profile currently in use. When the vehi‐ movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle cle is unlocked via the remote control, the po‐ control could lead to an accident.◀ sition is automatically retrieved if the Function, Do not incline the backrest too far to the refer to page 44, is activated for this purpose. rear Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear while driving, or there is a risk of slipping under the safety belt in the event of an accident. This would eliminate the protection normally pro‐ vided by the belt.◀

56 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 57

Adjusting Controls

Adjustments in detail Thigh support 1. Forward/back. Multifunctional seat

2. Height. Adjust the position using the lever.

Lumbar support The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐ justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐ gion of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture. ▷ Press the front/rear section of the switch. 3. Seat tilt. The curvature is increased/ decreased. ▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐ tion of the switch. The curvature is shifted up/ down.

Backrest width Change the width of the back‐ rest using the side wings to ad‐ 4. Backrest tilt. just the lateral support.

To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle, the backrest width temporarily opens fully.

57 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 58

Controls Adjusting

Shoulder support Switching on Press button once for each tempera‐ ture level. The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit. If the journey is continued within approx. 15 minutes, the seat heating is activated automat‐ ically with the temperature selected last. When ECO PRO, refer to page 186, is acti‐ vated, the heater output is reduced. Also supports the back in the shoulder area: ▷ Results in a relaxed seating position. Switch off ▷ Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles. Press button longer. Active seat The LEDs go out. Active adjustment of the seat cushion's con‐ tours reduces muscular tension and fatigue to Temperature distribution help prevent lower back pain. The heating action in the seat cushion and backrest can be distributed in different ways. On the Control Display: 1. "Climate" 2. "Front seat heating" 3. Select the required seat. 4. Turn the controller to set the temperature distribution.

Press button. The LED lights up. Active seat ventilation, front The seat cushion and backrest surfaces are Front seat heating cooled by means of integrated fans. The ventilation cools the seat, e. g., if the vehi‐ cle interior is overheated or for continuous cooling at high temperatures.

58 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 59

Adjusting Controls

Switching on Hints Press button once for each ventilation One person per safety belt level. Never allow more than one person to The highest level is active when three LEDs wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or are lit. small children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀

After a short time, the system automatically Putting on the belt moves down one level in order to prevent ex‐ Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly cessive cooling. across the lap and shoulders, as close to the body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies Switch off low around the hips in the lap area and does Press button longer. not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt The LEDs go out. can slip over the hips in a frontal impact and in‐ jure the abdomen. The safety belt must not lie across the neck, Safety belts rub on sharp edges, be routed over breakable objects, or be pinched.◀ Seats with safety belt What reduces the restraining effect The vehicle has four seats, each of which is Avoid wearing bulky clothing, and pull equipped with a safety belt. the shoulder belt periodically to readjust the General information tension. Make sure that the belt is not jammed; otherwise, the belt can be damaged and the Always make sure that safety belts are being restraining effect is reduced.◀ worn by all occupants before driving off. For the occupants' safety the belt locking Buckling the belt mechanism triggers early. Slowly guide the belt out of the holder when applying it. Although airbags enhance safety by providing added protection, they are not a substitute for safety belts. The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point will be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐ ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted. ▷ The two outer safety belt buckles, integrated into the rear seat, are for pas‐ Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in sengers sitting on the left and right. the belt buckle. ▷ The center rear safety belt buckle is solely intended for the center passenger. Tensioning the safety belt automatically When the belt is closed, it is automatically tightened once after the release.

59 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 60

Controls Adjusting

Unbuckling the belt Front headrests 1. Hold the belt firmly. 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. Correctly adjusted head restraint

3. Guide the belt back into its roll-up mecha‐ General information nism. A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the Safety belt reminder for driver's and risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event passenger's seat of an accident. The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐ Note nal sounds. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly. The Adjusting the head restraint safety belt reminder is active at speeds above Adjust the head restraints of all occupied approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be activated seats properly; otherwise, there is an increased if objects are placed on the front passenger risk of injury in an accident.◀ seat. Height Safety mode Adjust the head restraint so that its center is In critical situations, e.g., during full brake ap‐ approximately at ear level. plication, the front safety belts tighten auto‐ matically. Distance If the situation passes without an accident oc‐ Adjust the distance so that the head restraint curring, the belt tension relaxes. is as close as possible to the back of the head. If the belt tension does not loosen automati‐ Active head restraint cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the belt using the red button in the buckle. Fasten the In the event of a rear-end collision with a cer‐ belt before continuing on your trip. tain severity, the active head restraint automat‐ ically reduces the distance from the head. Damage to safety belts Reduced protective function Wear and tear after accidents or when dam‐ ▷ Do not use seat or head restraint aged otherwise: covers. Have the safety belts, including the safety belt ▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers, tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors on the head restraints. checked. ▷ Only attach accessories approved by BMW Check and replace safety belts to the seat or head restraint. This should only be done by your service Otherwise, the protective function of the active center; otherwise, this safety feature might not head restraint will be impaired and the per‐ work properly.◀ sonal safety of the occupants will be endan‐ gered.◀ Wear and tear after accidents or when dam‐ aged otherwise: Have the active headrest checked and if needed replaced.

60 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 61

Adjusting Controls

Adjusting the height Entering the rear

Note Keep the movement area unobstructed When changing the seat position, keep the seat's area of movement unobstructed; otherwise, people might get injured or objects damaged.◀

Folding back and locking the backrest Adjusting electrically. Before driving off, fold back and lock the backrests; otherwise, an unexpected seat Distance to the back of the head movement may cause an accident.◀

Unlocking the backrest

▷ Forward: pull. ▷ Back: press the button and push the head restraint toward the rear. 1. Pull lever up to the stop. 2. Fold backrest forward. Adjusting the side extensions Changing the seat position

Requirements ▷ Vehicle at a standstill. ▷ When the door is open, the seat is accessi‐ ble from the side on which the door is open.

Fold forward for increased lateral support in the resting position.

Removing The head restraints cannot be removed.

61 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 62

Controls Adjusting

Controls Keep the movement area unobstructed When changing the seat position, keep the seat's area of movement unobstructed; otherwise, people might get injured or objects damaged.◀

At a glance

▷ Press and hold this button until the seat has moved to the desired position. Releas‐ ing the button stops window/roof move‐ ment. ▷ Press button briefly. The seat automati‐ cally moves to the respective end position. Pressing again stops the motion. Storing Folding back and locking the backrest 1. Switch on the ignition. After entering the rear, fold the backrest back 2. Set the desired position. and lock it. 3. Press button. The LED in the but‐ Press button. The seat moves to its origi‐ ton lights up. nal position. Pressing again stops the motion. 4. Press selected button 1 or 2 while the LED is lit. The LED goes out. If the SET button is pressed accidentally: Seat, mirror, and steering Press button again. wheel memory The LED goes out.

The concept Calling up settings Two driver's seat and exterior mirror positions can be stored per profile, refer to page 35, and Comfort function called up. Settings for the backrest width and 1. Open the driver's door. lumbar support are not stored in memory. 2. Switch off the ignition. Hints 3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2. Do not retrieve the memory while driving The corresponding seat position is performed automatically. Do not retrieve the memory setting while driving, as an unexpected movement of the The procedure stops when a reel for adjusting seat could result in an accident.◀ the seat or one of the buttons is pressed.

62 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 63

Adjusting Controls

Safety mode At a glance 1. Close the driver's door or reel on the igni‐ tion. 2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2 until the adjustment procedure is com‐ pleted.

Calling up of a seat position deactivated After a brief period, calling up stored seat posi‐ tions is deactivated to save battery power. 1 Adjusting 63 To reactivate calling up of a seat position: 2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor ▷ Open or close the door or trunk lid. 3 Fold in and out 64 ▷ Press a button on the remote control. ▷ Press the Start/Stop button. Selecting a mirror To change over to the other mirror: Mirrors Slide the switch.

Exterior mirrors Adjusting electrically The setting corresponds to the direc‐ General information tion in which the button is pressed. The mirror on the passenger side is more curved than the driver's side mirror. Saving positions Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mir‐ ror setting is stored for the profile currently in Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re‐ to page 62. mote control, the position is automatically re‐ trieved if this function is active. Adjusting manually In case of electrical malfunction press edges of Note mirror. Estimating distances correctly Automatic Curb Monitor Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear. Do not estimate the distance The concept to the traffic behind you based on what you If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on see in the mirror, as this will increase your risk the front passenger side is tilted downward. of an accident.◀ This improves your view of the curb and other low-lying obstacles when parking, e.g.

63 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 64

Controls Adjusting

Activating Interior rearview mirror, automatic dimming feature 1. Slide the switch to the driver's side mirror position. The concept 2. Engage selector lever position R.

Deactivating Slide the switch to the passenger side mirror position.

Fold in and out Press button.

Photocells are used for control: Possible at speeds up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h. ▷ In the mirror glass. E. g. this is advantageous ▷ On the back of the mirror. ▷ In car washes. ▷ In narrow streets. Functional requirement ▷ For folding mirrors back out that were For proper operation: folded away manually. ▷ Keep the photocells clean. Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐ ▷ Do not cover the area between the inside matically at a speed of approx. rearview mirror and the windshield. 25 mph/40 km/h. Fold in the mirror in a car wash Steering wheel Before washing the car in an automatic car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or Note with the button; otherwise, the mirrors could be damaged, depending on the width of the Do not adjust while driving vehicle.◀ Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement Automatic heating could result in an accident.◀ Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated whenever the engine is running.

Automatic dimming feature Both exterior mirrors are automatically dim‐ med. Photocells are used to control the Interior rearview mirror, refer to page 64.

64 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 65

Adjusting Controls

Adjusting

The steering wheel can be adjusted in four di‐ rections.

Storing the position Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer to page 62.

Assistance getting in and out The steering wheel temporarily moves into the highest position to make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle.

Steering wheel heating

Press button.

▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 min, steering wheel heating is automatically acti‐ vated again.

65 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 66

Controls Transporting children safely

Transporting children safely

The right place for children Note Note Children in the vehicle Deactivating the front-seat passenger Do not leave children unattended in the airbags vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐ If a child restraint system is used in the front selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the passenger seat, deactivate the front-seat pas‐ doors.◀ senger airbags; otherwise, there is an in‐ creased risk of injury to the child when the air‐ Children should always be in the rear bags are activated, even with a child restraint system.◀ Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the back seat. Transporting children in the rear Installing child restraint Only transport children younger than systems 13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in the rear in child restraint systems provided in Hints accordance with the age, weight and size of the child; otherwise, there is an increased risk Manufacturer's information for child re‐ of injury in an accident. straint systems Children 13 years of age or older must wear a To select, mount and use child restraint sys‐ safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint tems, observe the information provided by the system can no longer be used due to their age, system manufacturer; otherwise, the protec‐ weight and size.◀ tive effect can be lost.◀ Ensuring the stability of the child seat Children on the front passenger seat When installing child restraint systems, Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐ make sure that the child seat is securely fas‐ straint system in the front passenger seat, tened to the backrest of the seat. Angle and make sure that the front, knee and side airbags headrest of the backrest might need to be ad‐ on the front passenger side are deactivated. justed or possibly be removed. Make sure that Automatic deactivation of front-seat passen‐ all backrests are securely locked. Otherwise ger airbags, refer to page 109. the stability of the child seat can be affected, and there is an increased risk of injury because

66 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 67

Transporting children safely Controls

of unexpected movement of the seat back‐ the adjustment after this; otherwise, the stabil‐ rest.◀ ity of the child seat will be reduced.◀ Adjustable backrest width: before installing a On the front passenger seat child restraint system in the front passenger seat, open the backrest width completely. Do Deactivating airbags not change the backrest width again and do Deactivating the front-seat passenger not call up a memory position. airbags Child seat security If a child restraint system is used in the front passenger seat, deactivate the front-seat pas‐ senger airbags; otherwise, there is an in‐ creased risk of injury to the child when the air‐ bags are activated, even with a child restraint system.◀ After installing a child restraint system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated. The rear safety belts and the front passenger Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐ automatically, refer to page 109. ten child restraint systems. Seat position and height The front passenger safety belt can be perma‐ nently locked to fasten child restraint systems. Before installing a child restraint system, move the front passenger seat as far back as possi‐ ble and adjust its height to the highest and Locking the safety belt thus best possible position for the belt and to 1. Pull out the strap completely. offer optimal protection in the event of an acci‐ 2. Secure the child restraint system with the dent. belt. If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐ 3. Allow the strap to be pulled in and pull it cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat, tight against the child restraint system. move the passenger seat carefully forward un‐ The safety belt is locked. til the best possible belt guide position is reached. Unlocking the safety belt Backrest width 1. Unbuckle the belt buckle. Backrest width for the child seat 2. Remove the child restraint system. Before installing a child restraint system 3. Allow the strap to be pulled in completely. in the front passenger seat, the backrest width must be opened completely. Do not change

67 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 68

Controls Transporting children safely

LATCH child restraint system LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐ Before installing LATCH child dren. restraint systems Pull the belt away from the area of the child re‐ Note straint system. Follow manufacturer's information for LATCH child restraint systems Assembly of LATCH child restraint systems To mount and use the LATCH child restraint systems, observe the operating and safety in‐ 1. Mount the child restraint system; refer to formation from the system manufacturer; oth‐ the user's manual of the system. erwise, the level of protection may be re‐ 2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐ duced.◀ erly connected.

Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors Upper LATCH retaining strap The lower anchors may be used to attach the For Canadian customers Only. CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child The following statement is required by Trans‐ and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child port Canada: is restrained by the internal harnesses. This vehicle is not equipped with user-ready tether anchorages. As such neither a child re‐ Note straint system, nor a booster cushion, requirer‐ Properly engage the lower LATCH an‐ ing the use of a tether strap can be properly chors secured in the vehicle. Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have properly engaged and that the child restraint system is resting snugly against the backrest; otherwise, the degree of protection may be re‐ duced.◀

Position The corresponding symbol shows the mounts for the lower LATCH anchors. Seats equipped with lower anchors are marked with a pair, 2, of LATCH sym‐ bols. It is not recommended to use the inner lower anchors of standard outer LATCH positions to fasten a child restraint system on the middle seat. Use the vehicle seat belt instead for the middle seat.

68 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 69

Driving Controls

Driving

Vehicle features and options To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary This chapter describes all standard, country- electronic systems/power consumers. specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not P when the ignition is switched off necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to P is engaged automatically when the ig‐ the selected options or country versions. This nition is switched off. When in an automatic car also applies to safety-related functions and wash, e.g., ensure that the ignition is not systems. The respectively applicable country switched off accidentally.◀ provisions must be observed when using the The ignition automatically cuts off while the respective features and systems. vehicle is stationary and the engine is stopped: ▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the Start/Stop button low beams are activated. ▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged The concept completely, so that the engine can still be started. This function is only available Pressing the Start/Stop button when the low beams are turned off. switches the ignition on or off and starts the engine. ▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and Steptronic transmission: The the low beams are turned off. engine starts if the brakes are stepped on while pressing the Start/Stop but‐ ▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled ton. with driver's door open and low beams off. The low beams switch to parking lights after approx. 15 minutes of no use. Ignition on Steptronic transmission: Press the Start/Stop Radio ready state button without stepping on the brake. Activate radio-ready state: All vehicle systems are ready for operation. ▷ When the engine is running: press the Most of the indicator and warning lights in the Start/Stop button. instrument cluster light up for a varied length Some electronic systems/power consumers of time. remain ready for operation. To save battery power when the engine is off, The radio-ready state switches off automati‐ switch off the ignition and any unnecessary cally: electronic systems/power consumers. ▷ After approx. 8 minutes. Ignition off ▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐ Steptronic transmission: Press the Start/Stop tral locking system. button again without stepping on the brake. ▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go completely, so that the engine can still be out. started.

69 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 70

Controls Driving

The radio-ready state remains active if, e.g., Steptronic transmission the ignition is automatically switched off for the following reasons: Starting the engine ▷ Opening or closing the driver's door. 1. Depress the brake pedal. ▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. ▷ When automatically switching from low The ignition is activated automatically for a beams to parking lights. certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐ If the engine is switched off and the ignition is gine starts. switched on, the system automatically switches to the radio-ready state if the lights are turned off or, if correspondingly equipped, Engine stop the daytime running lights are activated. Hints Take the remote control with you Starting the engine Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐ Hints not start the engine.◀ Enclosed areas Apply parking brake and further secure Do not let the engine run in enclosed the vehicle if needed. areas, since breathing in exhaust fumes may lead to loss of consciousness and death. The Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐ exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀ and downward inclines, further secure the ve‐ hicle, e.g., by turning the steering wheel in the Unattended vehicle direction of the curb.◀ Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running; doing so poses a risk of Before driving into a car wash danger. So that the vehicle can roll into a car wash ob‐ Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐ serve instructions for going into an automatic ning, set the parking brake and place the trans‐ car wash, refer to page 232. mission in selector lever position P or N to pre‐ vent the vehicle from moving.◀ Steptronic transmission

Repeated starting in quick succession Switching off the engine Avoid trying to start the vehicle repeat‐ 1. Engage selector lever position P with the edly and in quick succession. Otherwise, the vehicle stopped. fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned, 2. Press the Start/Stop button. posing a risk of overheating and damage to the catalytic converter.◀ The engine is switched off. The radio-ready state is switched on. Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at 3. Set the parking brake. moderate engine speeds.

70 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 71

Driving Controls

Auto Start/Stop function Functional limitations The engine is not switched off automatically in The concept the following situations: The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. ▷ External temperature too low. The system switches off the engine during a ▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐ stop, e.g., in traffic congestion or at traffic matic climate control is running. lights. The ignition remains switched on. The ▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated engine starts again automatically for driving or cooled to the required level. off. ▷ The engine is not yet at operating temper‐ Automatic mode ature. After every start of the engine using the Start/ ▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in steering wheel is being turned. the last selected state, refer to page 72. ▷ After driving in reverse. When the Auto Start/Stop function is active, it ▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐ is available when the vehicle is traveling faster matic climate control is switched on. than about 3 mph, approx. 5 km/h. ▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged. Engine stop ▷ At higher elevations. The engine is switched off automatically dur‐ ▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked. ing a stop under the following conditions: ▷ HDC Hill Descent Control is activated. Steptronic transmission: ▷ The parking assistant is activated. ▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐ ▷ Stop-and-go traffic. tion D. ▷ The selector lever is in position N, M/S or ▷ The brake pedal remains pressed while the R. vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is held ▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content. by Automatic Hold. ▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the Starting the engine driver's door is closed. The engine starts automatically under the fol‐ The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced lowing conditions: when the engine is switched off. ▷ Steptronic transmission: Displays in the instrument cluster By releasing the brake pedal. When Automatic Hold is activated: press The display indicates that the the accelerator pedal. Auto Start/Stop function is ready for an Automatic engine After the engine starts, accelerate as usual. start. Safety mode The display indicates that the After the engine switches off automatically, it conditions for an automatic en‐ will not start again automatically if any one of gine stop have not been met. the following conditions are met. ▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the driver's door is open.

71 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 72

Controls Driving

▷ The hood was unlocked. The engine can only be stopped or started Some indicator lights light up for a varied via the Start/Stop button. length of time. ▷ LED goes out: Auto Start/Stop function is The engine can only be started via the Start/ activated. Stop button. Switching off the vehicle during an Functional limitations automatic engine stop Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐ During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐ can be switched off permanently, e. g., when lowing situations: leaving it. ▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior 1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is when the cooling function is switched on. switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function ▷ The steering wheel is turned. is deactivated. ▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐ Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐ lector lever position D to R, N or M/S. matically. ▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐ 2. Set the parking brake. lector lever position P to N, D, R or M/S. Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button. ▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐ matic climate control is switched on. Automatic deactivation ▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged. In certain situations, Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated automatically for safety reasons ▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when as if the driver were absent. the heating is switched on. Malfunction Activating/deactivating the system manually The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches off the engine automatically. A Check Using the button Control message is displayed. It is possible to continue driving. Have the system checked.

Parking brake

The concept The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi‐ cle from rolling when it is parked.

Press button.

▷ LED comes on: Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated. The engine is started during an automatic engine stop.

72 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 73

Driving Controls

Overview If the vehicle is slowed down down to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/h the parking brake is set.

Releasing With the ignition switched on: Steptronic transmission: Press the switch while the brake is pressed or se‐ lector lever position P is set. The LED and indicator lamp go out. Parking brake The parking brake is released.

Setting Automatic release in cars with Steptronic transmission Apply parking brake and further secure the vehicle if needed. Inadvertent operation of the accelerator pedal Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐ erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward Make sure that the accelerator pedal is not op‐ and downward inclines, further secure the ve‐ erated unintentionally; otherwise, the vehicle is hicle, e.g., by turning the steering wheel in the set in motion and there is a risk of an acci‐ direction of the curb.◀ dent.◀ For automatic release, step on the accelerator Take the remote control with you pedal. Take the remote control with you when The LED and indicator lamp go out. leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐ not release the parking brake.◀ The parking brake is automatically released when you step on the accelerator: Pull the reel. ▷ Engine on. The LED lights up. ▷ Drive mode engaged. The indicator lamp lights up red. The ▷ Driver buckled in and doors closed. parking brake is set. Automatic Hold

While driving The concept Use as emergency brake while driving: This system assists the driver by automatically Pull the reel and hold it. The vehicle brakes setting and releasing the brake, such as when hard while the reel is being pulled. moving in stop-and-go traffic. The indicator lamp lights up red, a sig‐ The vehicle is automatically held in place when nal sounds and the brake lights light it is stationary. up. On inclines, the system prevents the vehicle A Check Control message is displayed. from rolling backward when driving off.

73 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 74

Controls Driving

Overview The indicator lamp lights up. Automatic Hold is activated.

Deactivating Press button again. The LED and the letters AUTO H go out.

Automatic Hold is deactivated. If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold, Automatic Hold press on the brake pedal to deactivate it. When the parking brake is set manually, Auto‐ Safety information matic Hold is deactivated automatically.

Secure the vehicle against rolling Driving Before leaving the vehicle with the en‐ Automatic Hold is activated: the vehicle is au‐ gine running, engage position P of the Step‐ tomatically secured against rolling after brak‐ tronic transmission and ensure that the park‐ ing to a standstill. ing brake is set. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to move.◀ The indicator lamp lights up green. Step on the accelerator pedal to drive Under the following conditions, Automatic off. Hold is automatically deactivated and the park‐ ing brake is set: The brake is released automatically. ▷ The engine is switched off. The indicator lamp goes out. ▷ A door is opened and driver's safety belt is Before driving into a car wash unbuckled while the vehicle is stationary. Before driving into the car wash, deacti‐ ▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a stand‐ vate Automatic Hold; otherwise, the parking still using the parking brake. brake will be set when the vehicle is stationary The indicator lamp switches from and the vehicle will no longer be able to roll.◀ green to red and the letters AUTO H go out. Parking The parking brake is automatically set if the Activating engine is switched off while the vehicle is be‐ This function can be activated when the driv‐ ing held by Automatic Hold. er's door is closed, the safety belt is fastened The indicator lamp changes from green and the engine is running. to red. Press button. The parking brake is not set if the en‐ The LED and the letters AUTO H light gine is switched off while the vehicle is coast‐ up. ing to a halt. Automatic Hold is deactivated.

74 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 75

Driving Controls

Automatic Hold remains activated during the Using turn signals engine stop brought about by the Auto Start/ Stop function. Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children, e.g., can‐ not release the parking brake.◀

Malfunction In the event of a failure or malfunction of the Press the lever beyond the resistance point. parking brake, secure the vehicle against roll‐ ing using a wheel chock, e.g., when leaving it. To switch off manually, press the lever to the resistance point. After a power failure Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed. Putting the parking brake into operation Triple turn signal activation 1. Switch on the ignition. Press the lever to the resistance point. 2. Press the reel while stepping on the The turn signal flashes three times. brake pedal or selector lever position P is The function can be activated or deactivated. set. On the Control Display: It may take several seconds for the brake to be 1. "Settings" put into operation. Any sounds associated with this are normal. 2. "Lighting" The indicator lamp in the instrument 3. "Triple turn signal" cluster goes out as soon as the parking Settings are stored for the profile currently in brake is ready for operation. use.

Signaling briefly Turn signal, high beams, Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal headlight flasher to flash. Turn signal

Hints Do not adjust the exterior mirrors Do not adjust the exterior mirror while driving and when turn signals/hazard warning flashers are on, or else the additional turn sig‐ nal lights in the exterior mirror are out of posi‐ tion and can't be seen.◀

75 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 76

Controls Driving

High beams, headlight flasher The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐ sition when released. ▷ Normal wiper speed: push up once. The wipers switch to intermittent operation when the vehicle is stationary. ▷ Fast wiper speed: press up twice or press once beyond the resistance point. Wipers change to normal speed when ve‐ hicle comes to standstill.

▷ High beams, arrow 1. Switch off and brief wipe ▷ Headlight flasher, arrow 2.

Washer/wiper system

Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe

Hints Do not activate wipers if frozen to wind‐ Push wiper lever down. shield The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐ Do not switch on the wipers if they are frozen sition when released. to the windshield; otherwise, the wiper blades ▷ Single wipe: press down once. and the wiper motor may be damaged.◀ ▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down once. Do not activate wipers on dry windshield ▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice. Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly.◀ Interval mode or rain sensor The concept Switching on The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐ shield, directly behind the interior rearview mir‐ ror.

Push wiper lever up.

76 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 77

Driving Controls

Activating/deactivating Clean the windshield, headlights

Press button on the wiper lever. Pull the wiper lever towards you. Wiping is started. If the vehicle is equipped The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐ with a rain sensor: LED in wiper lever lights up. shield and activates the wipers briefly. When wipers are frozen to windshield, wiper In addition, the headlights are cleaned at regu‐ operation is deactivated. lar intervals when the vehicle's lights are acti‐ During trip interruption with the rain sensor vated. switched on: if the trip is resumed within ap‐ prox. 15 minutes, the rain sensor is automati‐ Do not use the washer system at freezing cally activated again. temperatures Do not use the washers if fluid could freeze Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes onto the windshield which might impede your Deactivate the rain sensor when passing viewing field. Therefore use antifreeze fluid. through an automatic car wash; otherwise, un‐ Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is intentional wiping can cause damages.◀ empty; operation might damage pump.◀

Setting the frequency or sensitivity of Windshield washer nozzles the rain sensor The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐ cally heated while the ignition is switched on.

Fold-out position of the wipers Fold wipers back when you want to change the blades or with pending low temperatures.

1. Switch the ignition on and off again. 2. With icy conditions make sure that blades are not frozen to the windshield. Turn the thumbwheel. 3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐ onds, until the wiper remains in a nearly vertical position. After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated.

77 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 78

Controls Driving

Folding wipers back down Washer fluid reservoir Before switching the ignition on, fold the wipers back down to the windshield; other‐ wise, the wipers may become damaged when they are activated.◀ 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Push wiper lever down. Wipers move to their resting position and are ready again for operation.

All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐ Washer fluid ervoir. Fill with a mixture of windshield washer con‐ Hints centrate and tap water and – if required – with a washer antifreeze, according to the manufac‐ Antifreeze for washer fluid turer's recommendations. Antifreeze is flammable and can cause Mix the washer fluid before adding to find the injury if it is used incorrectly. right mixture. Therefore, keep it away from possible sources Do not add windshield washer concentrate and of ignition. antifreeze undiluted and do not fill with pure Only keep it in the closed original container water; this could damage the wiper system. and inaccessible to children. Do not mix window washer concentrates of dif‐ Follow the notes and instructions on the con‐ ferent manufacturers because they can clog tainer. the windshield washer nozzles. United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is Recommended minimum fill quantity: regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual 0.2 US gal/1 liter. states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐ Steptronic transmission tainer. Use BMW’s Windshield Washer Con‐ centrate or the equivalent.◀ Selector lever positions Adding washer fluid D Drive Only add washer fluid when the engine is Selector lever position for normal vehicle oper‐ cool, and then close the cover completely to ation. All gears for forward travel are activated avoid contact between the washer fluid and automatically. hot engine parts. Otherwise, there is a danger of fire and a risk to R is Reverse personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀ Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

N Neutral: The vehicle may roll. Use in automatic car washes, e.g.

78 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 79

Driving Controls

When the ignition is switched off, refer to Engaging D, R and N page 69, selector lever position P is engaged automatically.

P Park Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The drive wheels are blocked. P is engaged automatically: ▷ After the engine is switched off when the vehicle is in radio-ready state, refer to page 69, or when the ignition is switched Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐ off, refer to page 69, and when selector rection, beyond a resistance point if needed. lever position R or D is set. After releasing the selector lever, it returns to ▷ With the ignition off, if selector lever posi‐ its center position. tion N is set. ▷ If the driver's safety belt is released, the driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary and selector lever position D or R is set. Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se‐ lector lever position P is set. Otherwise, the ve‐ hicle may begin to move.

Kickdown Press unlock button, in order to: Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving ▷ Engage R. performance. Step on the accelerator pedal ▷ Shift out of P. beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position. Engaging P Engaging selector lever positions Press on the brake pedal until you start driving To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a gear, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.◀ ▷ It is not possible to shift out of selector lever position P until the engine is running and the brake is applied. Press button P. ▷ With the vehicle is stationary, press on the brake pedal before shifting out of P or N; otherwise, the shift command will not be executed: shift lock.

79 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 80

Controls Driving

Sport program and manual mode The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐ strument cluster, followed by the currently se‐ Activating the sport program lected gear.

Steptronic Sport transmission: prevent automatic upshifting in M/S manual mode The Steptronic Sport transmission does not automatically upshift in M/S manual mode once the maximum speed is reached, if one of the following conditions is met: ▷ DSC deactivated. Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐ ▷ TRACTION activated. tor lever position D. ▷ SPORT+ activated. The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐ In addition, the kickdown is deactivated. ment cluster, e.g., S1. The sport program of the transmission is acti‐ Ending the sport program/manual vated. mode Push the selector lever to the right. Activating the M/S manual mode D is displayed in the instrument cluster. 1. Press the selector lever to the left out of selector lever position D. Shift paddles 2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it backward. Manual mode becomes active and the gear is changed. The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster, e.g., M1. Once maximum engine speed is attained, or if the engine is getting too hot, M/S manual mode is automatically upshifted as needed. The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow you to shift gears quickly while keeping both Switching to manual mode hands on the steering wheel. ▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ ▷ Shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle. ward. ▷ Shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle. ▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐ wards. Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine and road speeds, for example downshifting is Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine not possible if the engine speed is too high. and road speeds and when necessary due to the temperature of the drivetrain, e.g., down‐ The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐ shifting is not possible if the engine speed is strument cluster, followed by the current gear. too high.

80 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 81

Driving Controls

If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are Steptronic Sport transmission: used to shift gears in automatic mode, the Launch Control transmission temporarily switches to manual mode. The concept In the manual mode, after conservative driving Launch Control enables optimum acceleration for a certain amount of time or if there has on surfaces with good traction. been no acceleration or shifting of the shift paddles within a certain amount of time, the Hints transmission switches back to automatic Component wear mode. Do not use Launch Control too often; otherwise, this may result in premature wear of Displays in the instrument cluster components due to the high stress placed on The selector lever position is dis‐ the vehicle.◀ played, e.g.: P. Do not use Launch Control during the break-in, refer to page 180, period. To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible. Electronic unlocking of the transmission lock An experienced driver may be able to achieve better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode. General information Requirements Electronically unlock the transmission lock to maneuver vehicle from the danger area. Launch Control is available when the engine is warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving Unlocking is possible, if the started can spin of at least 6 miles/10 km. the engine. To start with Launch Control do not steer the Engaging selector lever position N steering wheel. 1. Depress the brake pedal. Start with launch control 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter While the engine is running: must audibly start. 3. Press and hold the selector lever into posi‐ 1. Press button or select Sport+ with tion N. the Driving Dynamics Control. A corresponding Check Control message TRACTION is displayed in the instrument is displayed. cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF 4. Press the selector lever again into posi‐ lights up. tion N within approx. 6 seconds. 2. Engage selector lever position S. Position N is displayed in the instrument 3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on cluster. the brake. 5. Release brake, as soon as the starter 4. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal stops. beyond the resistance point at the full 6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area throttle position. and secure it against moving on its own.

81 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 82

Controls Driving

A flag symbol is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster. 5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within 3 seconds, release the brake. Before using Launch Control, allow the trans‐ mission to cool down for approx. 5 minutes. Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding conditions, e.g., wet pavement, when used again.

82 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 83

Displays Controls

Displays

Overview, instrument cluster

1 Fuel gauge 91 5 Engine oil temperature 91 2 Speedometer 6 Current fuel consumption 3 Messages, e.g. Check Control 7 Electronic displays 83 4 Tachometer 91 8 Reset miles 91

Electronic displays ▷ Selection lists, refer to page 95. ▷ Date, refer to page 92. ▷ External temperature, refer to page 91. ▷ Energy recovery, refer to page 93. ▷ Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 71. ▷ Transmission display, refer to page 81. ▷ On-board computer, refer to page 96. ▷ Miles/trip miles, refer to page 91.

83 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 84

Controls Displays

▷ Messages, e.g. Check Control, refer to ▷ Range, refer to page 92. page 87. ▷ Status, Driving Dynamics Control, refer to ▷ Current fuel consumption, refer to page 138. page 92. ▷ Service requirements, refer to page 93. ▷ Navigation display, see User's manual for ▷ Speed limit detection, refer to page 94. Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐ ▷ Time, refer to page 92. cation.

Multifunctional instrument display

The concept The instrument display is a variable display. In Some of the displays in the instrument display the event of a program change, the display may differ from the way they are shown in this rendition adapts to the respective program Owner's Manual. through the Driving Dynamics Control. The change of appearance can be deactivated on the Control Display.

At a glance

1 Fuel gauge 91 5 Tachometer 91 2 Indicator/warning lights 87 Selection lists 95 3 Speedometer ECO PRO displays 186 4 Variable displays 6 Engine oil temperature 91

84 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 85

Displays Controls

7 Computer 96 8 Reset miles 91

Switching the change of display on and off You can set whether the instrument display On the Control Display: automatically changes to the ECO PRO or 1. "Settings" SPORT in the display when you switch driving modes. 2. "Instrument cluster" 3. "Magnifier function" 1. "Settings" 2. "Instrument cluster" 3. "ECO PRO Info" Or"Driving mode view"

With Professional Navigation System: switching zoom function on/off You can program whether the current speed is to appear enlarged in the speedometer.

ECO PRO displays

1 Speedometer 2 Variable displays: ECO PRO Tips, Deceler‐ ation assistant instructions, Driver assist system displays

85 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 86

Controls Displays

3 Efficiency display 186 5 ▷ Blue: bonus range 4 Transmission display ▷ Gray: range

In the ECO PRO program the instrument dis‐ fuel consumption with more prominent repre‐ play switches to the ECO PRO displays. These sentation of the efficiency display and various displays support a driving style that saves on ECO PRO tips.

Sport displays

1 Speedometer 4 Shift lights, when respectively equipped 2 Tachometer 91 5 Performance display 3 Transmission display 81 6 Variable displays

In the Sport and Sport+ programs the instru‐ Shift lights in the instrument display ment display switches to the sport displays. These displays support a sporty driving style The concept with more prominent representation of the Shift lights indicate the optimum shift moment tachometer, the transmission displays, and the in the multifunction instrument display. Thus, vehicle speed. with a sporty driving style, the best possible vehicle acceleration is achieved.

86 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 87

Displays Controls

General information A Check Control message is displayed as a Steptronic Sport transmission: shift lights are combination of indicator or warning lights and shown, when the SPORT+ driving program is text messages in the instrument cluster and in activated. the Head-up Display. In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a Switching on shift lights text message may appear on the Control Dis‐ Steptronic Sport transmission: play.

1. Select SPORT+ using the Driving Dynam‐ Indicator/warning lights ics Control. 2. Activate the M/S manual mode of the General information transmission. The indicator and warning lights in the instru‐ ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐ Display in the instrument display nations and colors. Several of the lights are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on.

Red lights

Safety belt reminder Flashing or illuminated: safety belt on the driver or passenger side is not ▷ Current engine speed is displayed in the buckled. The safety belt reminder can tachometer. also be activated if objects are placed on the ▷ Arrow 1: successive yellow illuminated front passenger seat. fields indicate an increase in the speed. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned ▷ Arrow 2: successive orange illuminated correctly. fields indicate the upcoming shift moment. ▷ Arrow 3: fields are illuminated in red. Do Airbag system not wait any further to shift. Airbag system and belt tensioner are When the maximum possible speed is defective. reached, the entire display flashes. When the Have the vehicle checked by the serv‐ maximum speed is exceeded, the supply of ice center immediately. fuel is interrupted in order to protect the en‐ gine. Speeds in this range must be avoided. Parking brake The parking brake is set. Check Control

The concept For additional information, refer to Release The Check Control system monitors functions parking brake, refer to page 73. in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in the monitored systems.

87 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 88

Controls Displays

Brake system Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control Continue to drive moderately. Illuminated: vehicle driving ahead de‐ Have the vehicle checked by the serv‐ tected. ice center immediately. Flashing: the conditions are not ade‐ quate for operating the system. The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively resume control by Front-end collision warning pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator Illuminated: advance warning is issued, pedal. e.g., when there is the impending dan‐ ger of a collision or the distance to the Yellow lights vehicle ahead is too small. Increase distance. Anti-lock Braking System ABS Flashing: acute warning of the imminent dan‐ Avoid abrupt braking if possible. Brak‐ ger of a collision when the vehicle approaches ing force boost in some cases defec‐ another vehicle at a relatively high differential tive. Stop carefully. Take into account speed. longer brake travel. Have this checked Intervention by braking or make an evasive ma‐ by the service center immediately. neuver. DSC Dynamic Stability Control Pedestrian warning Flashing: DSC controls the drive and Symbol in the instrument cluster. braking forces. The vehicle is stabi‐ lized. Reduce speed and adapt driving profile to the driving circumstances. Symbol in the instrument display. Illuminated: DSC failed. Have the system checked by the service center. If a collision with a person detected in this way For additional information, refer to Dynamic is imminent, the symbol lights up and a signal Stability Control DSC, refer to page 134. sounds. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is Orange lights deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated Active Cruise Control Dynamic Stability Control DSC is The number bars shows the selected switched off or Dynamic Traction Con‐ distance from the vehicle driving trol DTC is switched on. ahead. For additional information, refer to Dynamic For additional information, refer to Active Stability Control, refer to page 134, and Dy‐ Cruise Control with Stop & Go function, ACC, namic Traction Control, refer to page 135. refer to page 142.

88 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 89

Displays Controls

Flat Tire Monitor FTM For additional information, refer to On-board Diagnostics socket, refer to page 221. The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of tire inflation pressure in a tire. Reduce your speed and stop cau‐ Lane departure warning tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma‐ System is switched on and under cer‐ neuvers. tain circumstances warns if a detected For more information, see Flat Tire Monitor, re‐ lane is left without flashing beforehand. fer to page 114. For additional information, refer to Lane depar‐ ture warning, refer to page 129. Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Illuminated: the Tire Pressure Monitor Green lights signals a loss of tire inflation pressure in a tire. Turn signal Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid Turn signal on. sudden braking and steering maneuvers. Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator Flashing and then continuously illuminated: no lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb flat tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be has failed. detected. For additional information, refer to Turn signal, ▷ Interference through systems or devices refer to page 75. with the same radio frequency: after leav‐ ing the area of the interference, the system Parking lights, headlight control automatically becomes active again. Parking lights or headlights are acti‐ ▷ TPM could not conclude the reset: perform vated. the reset of the system again. For additional information, refer to ▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted: Parking lights/low beams, headlight control, re‐ have the service center check it if needed. fer to page 102. ▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by your service center. Front fog lights For more information, see Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor, refer to page 111. Front fog lights are activated. For additional information, refer to Steering system Front fog lights, refer to page 105. Steering system in some cases defec‐ tive. High-beam Assistant Have the steering system checked by High-beam Assistant is switched on. the service center. High beams are activated and off auto‐ matically as a function of the traffic sit‐ Engine functions uation. For additional information, refer to High-beam Have the vehicle checked by the serv‐ Assistant, refer to page 104. ice center.

89 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 90

Controls Displays

Cruise control Symbols The system is switched on. It maintains Depending on the Check Control message, the the speed that was set using the con‐ following functions can be selected. trol elements on the steering wheel. ▷ "Owner's Manual" Display additional information about the Automatic Hold Check Control message in the Integrated Owner's Manual. The vehicle is automatically held in place when it is stationary. ▷ "Service request" On inclines, the system prevents the Contact your service center. vehicle from rolling backward when driving off. ▷ "Roadside Assistance" For more information, see Automatic Hold, re‐ Contact Roadside Assistance. fer to page 73. Hiding Check Control messages Blue lights

High beams High beams are activated. For additional information, refer to High beams, refer to page 76.

General lamps Press the onboard computer button on the Check Control turn signal lever. At least one Check Control message is ▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐ displayed or is stored. The symbol is played continuously and are not cleared shown in the display of the instrument until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐ cluster. eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐ sages are displayed consecutively. Text messages These messages can be faded for approx. Text messages in combination with a symbol 8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐ in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con‐ played again automatically. trol message and the meaning of the indicator ▷ Other Check Control messages are faded and warning lights. automatically after approx. 20 seconds. They are stored and can be displayed Supplementary text messages again later. Additional information, such as on the cause of an error or the required action, can be called up via Check Control. With urgent messages the added text will be automatically displayed on the Control Display.

90 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 91

Displays Controls

Displaying stored Check Control ▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of messages the temperature range. A Check Control On the Control Display: message is also displayed. 1. "Vehicle info" 2. "Vehicle status" Coolant temperature 3. "Check Control" If the coolant along with the engine becomes 4. Select the text message. too hot, a Check Control message is displayed. Messages after trip completion Check the coolant level, refer to page 218. Special messages displayed while driving are displayed again after the ignition is switched off. Odometer and trip odometer Display Fuel gauge ▷ Odometer, arrow 1. Vehicle tilt position may cause ▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2. the display to vary. Depending on the equipment version, the arrow beside the fuel pump symbol shows which Show/reset kilometers side of the vehicle the fuel filler flap is on. Press the knob. Hints on refueling, refer to page 194. ▷ When the ignition is switched off, the time, the external temperature and Tachometer the odometer are displayed. Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning ▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip field. In this range, the fuel supply is inter‐ odometer is reset. rupted to protect the engine.

External temperature Engine oil temperature If the indicator drops to ▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signal the low temperature end. sounds. Drive at moderate engine A Check Control message is and vehicle speeds. displayed. ▷ Normal operating tempera‐ There is an increased risk of ice on roads. ture: the pointer is in the middle or in the left half of Ice on roads the temperature display. Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃, roads might be icy.

91 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 92

Controls Displays

Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and Displaying the cruising range shaded roads, e.g., to avoid the increased risk Depending on your vehicle's optional features, of an accident.◀ the range can also be displayed as bar in the instrument cluster. Time 1. "Settings" 2. "Instrument cluster" The time is displayed at the bot‐ 3. "Additional indicators" tom of the instrument cluster. Setting the time and time for‐ With navigation system: range with mat, refer to page 98. destination guidance active If respective equipment is fitted and destination guidance is ac‐ Date tive, the remaining range is dis‐ The date is displayed in the played when the destination is computer. reached. Setting the date and date for‐ mat, refer to page 98. Current fuel consumption

Range Display Depending on your vehicle's op‐ Display tional features, the current fuel With a low remaining range: consumption can be displayed ▷ A Check Control message is in the instrument cluster. Check displayed briefly. whether you are currently driv‐ ing in an efficient and environmentally-friendly ▷ The remaining range is manner. shown on the on-board co‐ mupter. ▷ With a dynamic driving style - e.g., taking Displaying the current fuel curves aggressively - engine operation consumption might vary. 1. "Settings" 2. "Instrument cluster" The Check Control message appears continu‐ ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km. 3. "Additional indicators" Refuel promptly The bar display for the current fuel consump‐ tion is displayed in the instrument cluster. Refuel no later than at a range of 30 miles/50 km or engine operation might fail and damage might occur.◀

92 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 93

Displays Controls

Energy recovery Symbols

Display Sym‐ Description bols The kinetic energy of the vehicle is converted to electrical energy No service is currently required. while coasting. The vehicle bat‐ tery is partially charged and fuel consumption can be reduced. The deadline for scheduled mainte‐ nance or a legally mandated inspec‐ tion is approaching. Service requirements The service deadline has already passed. The concept After the ignition is turned on the instrument Entering appointment dates cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐ tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐ Enter the dates for the required inspections. nance. Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are Your service specialist can read the current set correctly. service requirements from your remote con‐ On the Control Display: trol. 1. "Vehicle info" Display 2. "Vehicle status" Data regarding the service status or legally 3. "Service required" mandated vehicle inspections are automati‐ 4. "§ Vehicle inspection" cally transmitted to your service center before 5. "Date:" a service due date. 6. Adjust the settings. Detailed information on service 7. Confirm. requirements The entered date is stored. More information on the scope of service re‐ quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐ Automatic Service Request play. Data regarding the service status or legally On the Control Display: mandated vehicle inspections are automati‐ cally transmitted to your service center before 1. "Vehicle info" a service due date. 2. "Vehicle status" You can check when your service center was 3. "Service required" notified. Required maintenance procedures and le‐ On the Control Display: gally mandated inspections are displayed. 1. "Vehicle info" 4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐ tion. 2. "Vehicle status" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Last Service Request"

93 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 94

Controls Displays

Gear shift indicator plays speed limits present on routes without signs. The concept Hints The system recommends the most fuel effi‐ cient gear for the current driving situation. Personal judgment Depending on the vehicle's features and coun‐ The system cannot serve as a substitute try version of the vehicle, the gear shift indica‐ for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic tor is active in the manual mode of the Step‐ situation. tronic transmission and with manual The system assists the driver and does not re‐ transmission. place the human eye.◀ Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. At a glance On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the engaged gear is displayed. Camera

Steptronic transmission: displays

Example Description

Fuel efficient gear is set.

Shift into fuel efficient gear.

The camera is found near the interior rearview mirror. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ Speed limit detection terior rearview mirror clean and clear. The concept Switching on/off Speed limit detection On the Control Display: Speed limit detection uses a symbol in the 1. "Settings" shape of a traffic sign to display the currently detected speed limit. The camera in the area of 2. "Instrument cluster" the interior rearview mirror detects traffic signs 3. "Speed limit information" at the edge of the road as well as variable over‐ If speed limit detection is switched on, it can head sign posts. Traffic signs with extra sym‐ be displayed on the info display in the instru‐ bols for wet road conditions, etc. are also de‐ ment cluster via the computer. tected and compared with the vehicle's onboard data, such as for the rain sensor, and Display will be displayed depending on the situation. The following is displayed in the instrument The system takes into account the information cluster: stored in the navigation system and also dis‐

94 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 95

Displays Controls

Speed limit detection Selection lists in the Current speed limit. instrument cluster

The concept Depending on your vehicle's optional features, the following can be displayed or operated us‐ Speed limit detection is not ing the buttons and the thumbwheel on the available. steering wheel as well as the displays in the in‐ strument cluster and the Head-up Display: ▷ Current audio source. ▷ Redial phone feature. Speed limit detection can also be displayed in ▷ Turn on voice activation system. the Head-up Display. Display System limits The system may not be fully functional and may provide incorrect information in the fol‐ lowing situations: ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. ▷ When signs are concealed by objects. ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you. ▷ When driving toward bright lights. ▷ When the windshield behind the interior Depending on your vehicle's optional features, rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ the list in the instrument cluster can differ from ered by a sticker, etc. the illustration shown. ▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the camera. Activating a list and adjusting the setting ▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation system are incorrect. ▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐ tem. ▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such as due to changes in road routing. ▷ When passing buses or trucks with a speed sticker. ▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ On the right side of the steering wheel, turn ately after vehicle shipment. the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding list.

95 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 96

Controls Displays

Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set‐ Not for a multi-functional instrument dis‐ ting and confirm it by pushing the thumbwheel. play. ▷ Time of arrival. When destination guidance is activated in On-board computer the navigation system. ▷ Distance to destination. Indication in the info display When destination guidance is activated in The information from the com‐ the navigation system. puter is shown in the info display ▷ ECO PRO bonus range. in the instrument cluster. Adjusting the info display Depending on the vehicle equipment version, Calling up information on the info you can select what information from the com‐ display puter is to be displayed on the info display of the instrument cluster. On the Control Display: 1. "Settings" 2. "Instrument cluster" 3. Select the desired displays.

Information in detail

Range Press the onboard computer button on the Displays the estimated cruising range available turn signal lever. with the remaining fuel. Information is displayed in the info display of It is calculated based on your driving style over the instrument cluster. the last 20 miles/30 km. If there is only enough fuel left for less than Information at a glance 45 miles/80 km, the color of the display Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn changes. signal lever calls up the following information in the info display: Average fuel consumption ▷ Range. The average fuel consumption is calculated for ▷ Average consumption, fuel. the period while the engine is running. ▷ Average consumption, fuel. The average fuel consumption is calculated for the distance traveled since the last reset by the ▷ Miles and trip miles. on-board comupter. For a multi-functional instrument display. ▷ Average speed. Average speed ▷ Date. Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the ▷ Speed limit detection. engine manually stopped are not included in the calculation of the average speed.

96 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 97

Displays Controls

Resetting average values Display on the Control Display Press and hold the onboard computer button Display the computer or trip computer on the on the turn signal lever. Control Display. 1. "Vehicle info" Distance to destination 2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer" The distance remaining to the destination is displayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐ Resetting the fuel consumption or gation system before the trip is started. speed The distance to the destination is adopted au‐ On the Control Display: tomatically. 1. "Vehicle info" Time of arrival 2. "Onboard info" The estimated time of arrival is 3. "Consumpt." or "Speed" displayed if a destination is en‐ 4. "Yes" tered in the navigation system before the trip is started. The time must be correctly set. Sport displays

Speed limit detection The concept Description of the speed limit detection, refer On the Control Display, the current values for to page 94, function. performance and torque can be displayed if the vehicle is appropriately equipped. Trip computer The vehicle features two types of board com‐ Displaying sport displays on the puters. Control Display 1. "Vehicle info" ▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as often as necessary. 2. "Sport displays" ▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an overview of the current trip. Speed warning Resetting the trip computer The concept On the Control Display: Displays a speed, when reached, should cause 1. "Vehicle info" a warning to be issued. 2. "Trip computer" The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed 3. "Reset": all values are reset. drops below the set speed once by at least "Automatically reset": all values are reset 3 mph/5 km/h. approx. 4 hours after the vehicle came to a standstill.

97 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 98

Controls Displays

Displaying, setting or changing the 3. "Time zone:" speed warning 4. Select the desired time zone. On the Control Display: The time zone is stored. 1. "Settings" Setting the time 2. "Speed" 1. "Settings" 3. "Warning at:" 2. "Time/Date" 4. Turn the controller until the desired speed is displayed. 3. "Time:" 5. Press the controller. 4. Turn the controller until the desired hours are displayed. Speed warning is stored. 5. Press the controller. Activating/deactivating the speed 6. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐ warning nutes are displayed. On the Control Display: 7. Press the controller.

1. "Settings" The time is stored. 2. "Speed" Setting the time format 3. "Warning" 1. "Settings" 4. Press the controller. 2. "Time/Date" Setting your current speed as the 3. "Format:" speed warning 4. Select the desired format. On the Control Display: The time format is stored.

1. "Settings" Automatic time setting 2. "Speed" Depending on your vehicle's optional features, 3. "Select current speed" the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are 4. Press the controller. updated automatically. The current vehicle speed is stored as the 1. "Settings" speed warning. 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Auto time set" Settings on the Control Display Date Setting the date Time 1. "Settings" Setting the time zone 2. "Time/Date" 1. "Settings" 3. "Date:" 2. "Time/Date" 4. Turn the controller until the desired day is displayed.

98 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 99

Displays Controls

5. Press the controller. Brightness 6. Make the necessary settings for the month and year. Setting the brightness The date is stored. To set the brightness of the Control Display: 1. "Settings" Setting the date format 2. "Control display" 1. "Settings" 3. "Brightness" 2. "Time/Date" 4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐ 3. "Format:" ness is set. 4. Select the desired format. 5. Press the controller. The date format is stored. Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. Language Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐ ness settings may not be clearly visible. Setting the language To set the language on the Control Display:

1. "Settings" Head-up Display 2. "Language/Units" The concept 3. "Language:" 4. Select the desired language. Settings are stored for the profile currently in use.

Setting the voice dialog Voice dialog for the voice activation system, refer to page 27.

Units of measure This system projects important information into the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed. Setting the units of measure The driver can get information without averting To set the units for fuel consumption, route/ his or her eyes from the road. distance and temperature:

1. "Settings" Display visibility 2. "Language/Units" The visibility of the displays in the Head-up 3. Select the desired menu item. Display is influenced by the following factors: 4. Select the desired unit. ▷ Certain sitting positions. Settings are stored for the profile currently in ▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐ use. play. ▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters. ▷ Wet roads.

99 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 100

Controls Displays

▷ Unfavorable light conditions. Setting the brightness If the image is distorted, check the basic set‐ The brightness is automatically adjusted to the tings. ambient brightness. The basic setting can be adjusted manually. Switching on/off On the Control Display: 1. "Settings" 2. "Head-Up Display" 3. "Brightness" 4. Turn the controller. When the low beams are activated, the bright‐ ness of the Head-up Display can be addition‐ ally influenced using the instrument lighting. Settings are stored for the profile currently in Press button. use.

Adjusting the height Display On the Control Display:

Overview 1. "Settings" ▷ Speed. 2. "Head-Up Display" ▷ Navigation system. 3. "Height" ▷ Check Control messages. 4. Turn the controller. ▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster. Settings are stored for the profile currently in ▷ Driver assistance systems. use. Some of this information is only displayed briefly as needed. Setting the rotation On the Control Display: Selecting displays in the Head-up Display 1. "Settings" 2. "Head-Up Display" On the Control Display: 3. "Rotation" 1. "Settings" 4. Turn the controller. 2. "Head-Up Display" Settings are stored for the profile currently in 3. "Displayed information" use. 4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up Display. Special windshield Settings are stored for the profile currently in The windshield is part of the system. use. The shape of the windshield makes it possible to display a precise image. A film in the windshield prevents double im‐ ages from being displayed.

100 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 101

Displays Controls

Therefore, have the special windshield re‐ placed by a service center only.

101 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 102

Controls Lights

Lights

Vehicle features and options Parking lights/low beams, This chapter describes all standard, country- headlight control specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not General information necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to Position of switch: , , the selected options or country versions. This If the driver door is opened with the ignition also applies to safety-related functions and switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐ systems. The respectively applicable country cally switched off at these switch settings. provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Parking lights Position of switch : the vehicle's lights Overview light up on all sides, e.g., for parking. Do not use the parking lights for extended pe‐ riods; otherwise, they might drain the battery and it would then be impossible to start the en‐ gine. When parking, it is preferable to switch on the one-sided roadside parking lights, refer to page 103.

Low beams Position of switch with the ignition 1 Rear fog lights switched on: the low beams light up. 2 Front fog lights 3 Depending on the equipment: automatic Welcome lights headlight control, Adaptive Light Control, When parking the vehicle, leave the switch in High-beam Assistant, Welcome lights, position or : the parking and interior Daytime running lights lights light up briefly when the vehicle is un‐ 4 Lights off, daytime running lights locked. 5 Parking lights, daytime running lights Activating/deactivating 6 Depending on the equipment: low beams, On the Control Display: welcome lights, High-beam Assistant 7 Instrument lighting 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Welcome lights" Settings are stored for the profile currently in use.

102 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 103

Lights Controls

Headlight courtesy delay feature Activating/deactivating The low beams stay lit for a short while after In some countries, daytime running lights are the radio-ready state is switched off if the mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐ lights are turned off and the headlight flasher is vate the daytime running lights. switched on. On the Control Display:

Setting the duration 1. "Settings" On the Control Display: 2. "Lighting" 3. "Daytime running lamps" 1. "Settings" Settings are stored for the profile currently in 2. "Lighting" use. 3. "Pathway lighting:" 4. Set length of time. Roadside parking lights Settings are stored for the profile currently in use.

Automatic headlight control Position of switch : the low beams are acti‐ vated and off automatically, e.g., in tunnels, in twilight or if there is precipitation. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. When emerging from a tunnel during the day, the low beams are not switched off immedi‐ The vehicle can be illuminated on one side. ately but instead only after approx. 2 minutes. A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can Switching on cause the lights to be switched on. With the ignition switched off, press the lever The low beams always stay on when the fog either up or down past the resistance point for lights are activated. approx. 2 seconds.

Personal responsibility Switch off The automatic headlight control cannot Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in serve as a substitute for your personal judg‐ the opposite direction. ment in determining when to turn the lights on in response to ambient lighting conditions. E. g. the sensors are unable to detect fog or Adaptive Light Control hazy weather. To avoid safety risks under these conditions, you should always switch on The concept the lights manually.◀ Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlight control system that enables dynamic illumina‐ Daytime running lights tion of the road surface. With the ignition switched on, the daytime run‐ Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐ ning lights light up in position , or rameters, the light from the headlight follows . After the ignition is switched off, the park‐ the course of the road. ing lights light up in position .

103 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 104

Controls Lights

In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or any time and switch the high beams non and when turning, an additional, corner-illuminating off as usual. lamp is switched on that lights up the inside of the curve when the vehicle is moving below a Note certain speed. Personal responsibility Activating The High-beam Assistant cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judg‐ Position of switch with the ignition ment of when to use the high beams. There‐ switched on. fore, manually reel off the high beams in situa‐ To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐ tions where required to avoid a safety risk.◀ tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐ er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill. Activating The turning lights are automatically switched on depending on the steering angle or the use of turn signals. When driving in reverse, the turning lights may be automatically switched on regardless of the steering angle.

Self-leveling headlights The self-leveling headlights compensate for acceleration and braking operations in order 1. Depending on the equipment, turn the light not to blind the oncoming traffic and to achieve switch into position or . optimum illumination of the roadway. 2. Press button on the turn signal lever, ar‐ Malfunction row. A Check Control message is displayed. The indicator lamp in the instrument Adaptive Light Control is malfunctioning or has cluster lights up. failed. Have the system checked as soon as When the low beams are on, the lights are au‐ possible. tomatically brightened or dimmed. The system responds to light from oncoming High-beam Assistant traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities. The concept The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐ When the low beams are activated, this system ment cluster lights up when the system automatically switches the high beams on and switches on the high beams. Depend‐ off or suppresses the light in the areas that ing on the version of the system in the vehicle, blind oncoming traffic. The procedure is con‐ the high beams may not switch off for oncom‐ trolled by a camera on the front of the interior ing vehicles, but may only be dimmed in the rearview mirror. The assistant ensures that the areas that blind oncoming traffic. In this case, high beams are activated whenever the traffic the blue indicator light will stay on. situation allows. The driver can intervene at

104 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 105

Lights Controls

Switching the high beams on and off Fog lights manually Front fog lights The parking lights or low beams must be switched on. Press button. The green indicator lamp lights up.

If the automatic headlight control, refer to page 103, is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the ▷ High beams on, arrow 1. front fog lights. ▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2. When the high beams or headlight flasher are activated, the front fog lights are not switched The High-beam Assistant can be switched off on. when manually adjusting the light. To reacti‐ vate the High-beam Assistant, press the but‐ ton on the turn signal lever. Instrument lighting

System limits Adjusting The system is not fully functional in situations The parking lights or low beams such as the following, and driver intervention must be switched on to adjust may be necessary: the brightness. ▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, Adjust the brightness with the such as fog or heavy precipitation. thumbwheel. ▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; and at animal crossings. Interior lights ▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐ General information sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐ coming traffic on freeways. The interior lights, footwell lights, access lights and courtesy lights are controlled automati‐ ▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the cally. presence of highly reflective signs. Thumb wheel for the instrument lighting con‐ ▷ At low speeds. trols brightness of some of these features. ▷ When the windshield behind the interior rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ ered with stickers, etc.

105 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 106

Controls Lights

Overview

1 Interior lights 2 Reading lamp

Switching the interior lights on and off Press button.

To reel off permanently: press the button for approx. 3 seconds. Switch back on: press button.

Reading lights Press button.

Bang & Olufsen High End Surround Sound System

Adjusting speaker lighting Some speakers in the vehicle are illuminated. The lighting can be individually set. 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "B&O" 4. Select the desired lighting setting. ▷ "Off": no lighting. ▷ "Reduced": the speakers in the field of view are faded while driving. ▷ "On": the speakers are always illumi‐ nated.

106 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 107

Safety Controls

Safety

Airbags

1 Front airbag, driver 3 Side airbag 2 Front airbag, front passenger 4 Knee airbags

Front airbags Knee airbag Front airbags help protect the driver and front The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal passenger by responding to frontal impacts in impact. which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐ equate restraint. Protective action Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ Side airbags tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the collisions. side of the body in the chest, lap, and head area.

107 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 108

Controls Safety

Information on how to ensure the optimal The ignition and inflation noise may lead to protective effect of the airbags short-term and, in most cases, temporary ▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags. hearing impairment in sensitive individuals. ▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the Malfunction, deactivation and after de‐ steering wheel rim, holding your hands at ploying the airbags the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to Do not touch the individual components imme‐ keep the risk of injury to your hands or diately after the system has been triggered; arms as low as possible when the airbag is otherwise, you may risk burns. triggered. Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐ ▷ There should be no person, animals, or ob‐ mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by jects between an airbag and a person. the service center or an authorized repair shop ▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on for handling explosives. the front passenger side as a storage area. Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐ ▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front tem could lead to failure in an emergency or passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐ unintentional activation of the airbag - both tach adhesive labels or coverings and do may lead to injury.◀ not attach brackets or cables, e. g., for GPS Warnings and information on the airbags are devices or' mobile phones. also found on the sun visors. ▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐ ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and Functional readiness of the airbag legs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries system might occur when front airbag is activated. When the ignition is reel on, the warn‐ ▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or ing lamp in the instrument cluster lights other objects on the front passenger seat up briefly and thereby indicates the op‐ that are not approved specifically for seats erational readiness of the entire airbag system with integrated side airbags. and the belt tensioner. ▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jackets, over the backrests. Airbag system malfunctioning ▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads ▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the away from the side airbag; otherwise, inju‐ ignition is turned on. ries might occur when airbag is activated. ▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously. ▷ Do not remove the airbag system. ▷ Do not remove the steering wheel. In case of a malfunction have airbag sys‐ tem checked immediately. ▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐ bag cover panels, do not cover them or In case of a malfunction have airbag system modify them in any way. checked immediately; otherwise, there is a risk that the system does not function as expected ▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐ in case of a severe accident.◀ nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This also applies to steering wheel covers, the dashboard, and the seats.◀ Even when you follow all instructions very closely, injury from contact with the airbags cannot be ruled out in certain situations.

108 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 109

Safety Controls

Automatic deactivation of the front- ▷ Do not place objects under the seat that seat passenger airbags could press against the seat from below. The system reads if the front passenger seat is ▷ No moisture in or on the seat. occupied by measuring the human body's re‐ sistance. Indicator lamp for the front-seat Front, knee and side airbag on the front pas‐ passenger airbags senger's side are either activated or deacti‐ vated. Leave feet in the footwell Make sure that the front passenger keeps his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, proper functioning of the front passenger air‐ bag might not be assured.◀

Child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat The indicator lamp for the front-seat passen‐ Before transporting a child on the front pas‐ ger airbags indicates the operating state of the senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐ front-seat passenger airbags. structions for children on the front passenger The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ei‐ seat, see Children.◀ ther activated or deactivated.

▷ The indicator lamp lights up Malfunction of the automatic when a child is properly deactivation system seated in a child restraint fix‐ When transporting older children and adults, ing system or when the seat the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐ is empty. The airbags on the tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case, front passenger side are not the indicator lamp for the front-seat passenger activated. airbags lights up. ▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when, In this case, change the sitting position so that e.g., a correctly seated person of sufficient the front-seat passenger airbags are activated size is detected on the seat. The airbags and the indicator lamp goes out. on the front passenger side are activated. If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person sit in the rear. Detected child seats To enable correct recognition of the occupied The system generally detects children seated seat cushion in a child seat, particularly in child seats re‐ ▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats quired by NHTSA when the vehicle was manu‐ or other items to the front passenger seat factured. After installing a child seat, make unless they are specifically recommended sure that the indicator lamp for the front-seat by your vehicle's manufacturer. passenger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child seat has been detected and the ▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the front-seat passenger airbags are not activated. passenger seat if a child restraint system is to be installed on it.

109 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 110

Controls Safety

Strength of the driver's and front-seat Supplementing the reinforced front windshield passenger airbag frame, the rollover protection system further The explosive power that activates driver's/ increases passenger safety. front passenger's airbags very much depends on the positions of the driver's/front passeng‐ Hints er's seat. Keep the movement area unobstructed With a respective message appearing on Con‐ Always keep the movement area of the trol Display calibrate the front seats to keep rollover protection system clear. Otherwise, the accuracy of this function over the long- there may be damage or injuries when the roll‐ term. over protection system is triggered.◀

Calibrating the front seats In the event of malfunctions, deactivation A corresponding message appears on the or after deployment Control Display. Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐ mantled and the system scrapped by your 1. Press the reel and move the respective service center. Non-professional attempts to seat all the way forward. service the system could lead to failure in an 2. Press the reel forward again. The seat still emergency or unintentional activation of the moves forward slightly. airbag - both may lead to injury.◀ 3. Readjust the seat to the desired position. The calibration procedure is completed when Triggered rollover protection system the message on the Control Display disap‐ After deployment or damage pears. After deployment of the rollover protec‐ If the message continues to be displayed, re‐ tion system or in the event of damage, have peat the calibration. the system checked and replaced. If the message does not disappear after a re‐ Have this work performed only by your service peat calibration, have the system checked as center; otherwise, this safety feature might not soon as possible. work properly.◀ Unobstructed area of movement Do not move convertible top Ensure that the area of movement of the When the rollover protection system is seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury extended, do not move the convertible top. or damage to objects.◀ Otherwise, damages or injuries may result.◀ If the rollover protection system was not Rollover protection system placed under any stress after an automatic triggering, it can be pushed back by hand, e.g. The concept to close the convertible top. One person must push down on a safety frame and the another The rollover protection system is automatically person must close the convertible top. The activated in the event of a sufficiently serious accident or if the longitudinal axis is tilted ex‐ cessively. The safety frames located behind the rear headrests extend within fractions of a second.

110 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 111

Safety Controls

safety frame no longer engages in the lower With use of the system observe further infor‐ position. mation found under Tire inflation pressure, re‐ fer to page 198. 1. Press the release lever to the side and hold it. Functional requirements The system must have been reset with the correct tire inflation pressure; otherwise, relia‐ ble signaling of tire inflation pressure loss is not assured. Reset the system after each adjustment of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change. Always use wheels with TPM electronics to ensure that the system will operate properly. 2. Push down the safety frame and hold it. 3. Release the release lever only if the safety Status display frame was pushed back almost completely. The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni‐ 4. Close the convertible top. tor TPM can be displayed on the Control Dis‐ 5. Slowly reduce pressure on the safety play, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active. frame in order to allow it to move upwards. On the Control Display: Make sure that your hands do not become trapped between the safety frame and roof. 1. "Vehicle info" 2. "Vehicle status" Malfunction 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)" A Check Control message is displayed The status is displayed. when there is a malfunction. Status control display Tire and system status are indicated by the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM color of the wheels and a text message on the Control Display. The concept All wheels green The system monitors tire inflation pressure in the four mounted tires. The system warns you System is active and will issue a warning rela‐ if there is a significant loss of pressure in one tive to the tire inflation pressures stored during or more tires. For this purpose, sensors in the the last reset. tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure and tire temperature. One wheel is yellow A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in Hints the indicated tire. Tire damage due to external factors All wheels are yellow Sudden tire damage caused by external A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in circumstances cannot be recognized in ad‐ several tires. vance.◀

111 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 112

Controls Safety

Wheels, gray Low tire pressure message The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons The yellow warning lamp lights up. A for this may be: Check Control message is displayed. ▷ The system is being reset. ▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in ▷ Malfunction. tire inflation pressure. ▷ No reset was performed for the system. Status information The system therefore issues a warning The status control display additionally shows based on the tire inflation pressures before the current tire inflation pressures and, de‐ the last reset. pending on the model, tire temperatures. It shows the actual values read; they may vary 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. depending on driving style or weather condi‐ Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ tions. vers. 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with Carry out reset regular tires or run-flat tires. Reset the system after each adjustment of the Run-flat tires, refer to page 208, are la‐ tire inflation pressure and after every tire or beled with a circular symbol containing the wheel change. letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall. On the Control Display and on the vehicle: Do not continue driving without run-flat tires 1. "Vehicle info" Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not 2. "Vehicle status" equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving 3. "Perform reset" may result in serious accidents.◀ 4. Start the engine - do not drive off. A low tire inflation pressure might turn on DSC 5. Reset tire inflation pressure:"Perform Dynamic Stability Control. reset". 6. Drive away. Actions in the event of a flat tire The tires are shown in gray and the status is displayed. Normal tires After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a 1. Identify the damaged tire. short period, the set tire inflation pressures are Do this by checking the air pressure in all accepted as reference values. The reset is four tires. completed automatically while driving. The tire pressure gage of the Mobility Sys‐ After a successfully completed Reset, the tem, refer to page 208, can possibly be wheels on the Control Display are shown in used for this purpose. green and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires active" is displayed. is shown to be correct, it is possible that You may interrupt this trip at any time. When the Tire Pressure Monitor did not perform you continue the reset resumes automatically. a reset. Then perform the reset. If an identification is not possible, please contact the service center.

112 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 113

Safety Controls

2. Fixing a flat tire, where applicable with the ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐ Mobility System. ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc. Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility System, Continued driving with a flat tire may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In Drive moderately and do not exceed a this case, have the electronics checked at the speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. next opportunity and have them replaced if needed. Your car handles differently when you lose tire inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is re‐ Run-flat tires duced when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steering properties will Maximum speed change.◀ You may continue driving with a damaged tire Final tire failure at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of a tire. Reduce Continued driving with a flat tire speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: could come loose and cause an accident. Do 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ not continue driving and contact your service vers. center.◀ 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Required tire inflation pressure check 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at message the next opportunity. A Check Control message is displayed in the If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires following situations is shown to be correct, it is possible that the Tire Pressure Monitor did not perform ▷ The system has detected a wheel change, a reset. In that case, carry out a reset. but no reset was done. Possible driving distance with complete loss of ▷ Inflation was not carried out according to tire inflation pressure: specifications. The possible driving distance after a loss of tire ▷ The tire inflation pressure has fallen below inflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv‐ the level of the last confirmation. ing style and road conditions. In this case: A vehicle with an average load has a possible ▷ Check the tire pressure and correct as driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km. needed. A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐ ▷ Carry out a reset of the system after a tire ently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during change. braking, a longer braking distance and different self-steering properties. Adjust your driving System limits style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐ The system does not function properly if a re‐ neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs, set has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is potholes, etc. reported though tire inflation pressures are Because the possible driving distance de‐ correct. pends on how the vehicle is used during the The tire inflation pressure depends on the trip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐ tire's temperature. Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus

113 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 114

Controls Safety

increasing the tire inflation pressure. The tire sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated inflation pressure is reduced when the tire tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to temperature falls again. These circumstances tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐ may cause a warning when temperatures fall ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the very sharply. vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for Malfunction proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, The yellow warning lamp flashes and even if under-inflation has not reached the then lights up continuously. A Check level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low Control message is displayed. No flat tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also tire or loss of tire inflation pressure can be de‐ been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐ tected. cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐ Display in the following situations: ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐ tor is combined with the low tire pressure ▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted: telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐ have the service center check it if needed. tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one ▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by minute and then remain continuously illumi‐ your service center. nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐ ▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐ Reset the system again. function exists. When the malfunction indicator ▷ Interference through systems or devices is illuminated, the system may not be able to with the same radio frequency: after leav‐ detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. ing the area of the interference, the system TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of automatically becomes active again. reasons, including the installation of replace‐ ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle Declaration according to NHTSA/ that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐ FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐ System tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement Each tire, including the spare (if provided) or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS should be checked monthly when cold and in‐ to continue to function properly. flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size FTM Flat Tire Monitor indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the The concept proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) The system detects tire inflation pressure loss As an added safety feature, your vehicle has on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐ been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring tween the individual wheels while driving. system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐ In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the sure telltale when one or more of your tires is diameter and therefore the rotational speed of significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the corresponding wheel changes. This will be the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you detected and reported as a flat tire. should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐

114 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 115

Safety Controls

The system does not measure the actual infla‐ Indication of a flat tire tion pressure in the tires. The yellow warning lamp lights up. A Check Control message is displayed. Functional requirements There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire The system must have been initialized when inflation pressure. the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐ wise, reliable flagging of a flat tire is not as‐ 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐ Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ tion of the tire inflation pressure and after vers. every tire or wheel change. 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with regular tires or run-flat tires. Status display Run-flat tires, refer to page 208, are la‐ The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can beled with a circular symbol containing the be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall. whether or not the FTM is active. On the Control Display: Do not continue driving without run-flat tires 1. "Vehicle info" Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not 2. "Vehicle status" equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving 3. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)" may result in serious accidents.◀ The status is displayed. When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐ bility Control is switched on if needed. Initialization When initializing the once set inflation tire System limits pressures serve as reference values in order to Sudden tire damage detect a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐ Sudden serious tire damage caused by firming the tire inflation pressures. external circumstances cannot be recognized Do not initialize the system when driving with in advance.◀ snow chains. A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss in all On the Control Display: four tires will not be recognized. Therefore, 1. "Vehicle info" check the tire inflation pressure regularly. 2. "Vehicle status" The system could be delayed or malfunction in 3. "Perform reset" the following situations: 4. Start the engine - do not drive off. ▷ When the system has not been initialized. 5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset". ▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road surface. 6. Drive away. ▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction The initialization is completed while driving, wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting). which can be interrupted at any time. ▷ When driving with snow chains. The initialization automatically continues when driving resumes.

115 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 116

Controls Safety

Actions in the event of a flat tire A vehicle with a damaged tire reacts differ‐ ently, e.g., it has reduced lane stability during Normal tires braking, a longer braking distance and different 1. Identify the damaged tire. self-steering properties. Adjust your driving style accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering ma‐ Do this by checking the air pressure in all neuvers or driving over obstacles, e.g., curbs, four tires. potholes, etc. The tire pressure gage of the Mobility Sys‐ Because the possible driving distance de‐ tem, refer to page 208, can possibly be pends on how the vehicle is used during the used for this purpose. trip, the actual distance may be shorter or lon‐ If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires ger depending on the driving speed, road con‐ is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not ditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc. have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system. Continued driving with a flat tire If an identification is not possible, please Drive moderately and do not exceed a contact the service center. speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. 2. Fix the flat tire where applicable using the Your car handles differently when you lose tire Mobility System, refer to page 208. inflation pressure, e.g., your lane stability is re‐ duced when braking, braking distances are Run-flat tires longer and the self-steering properties will change.◀

Maximum speed Final tire failure You may continue driving with a damaged tire Vibrations or loud noises while driving at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. can indicate the final failure of a tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire Continued driving with a flat tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: not continue driving and contact your service center.◀ 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ vers. 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Intelligent Safety 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity. The concept If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires Intelligent Safety enables central operation of is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not the driver assistance system. have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system. Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, In‐ telligent Safety consists of one or more sys‐ Possible driving distance with complete loss of tems that can help prevent a imminent colli‐ tire inflation pressure: sion. These systems are active automatically The possible driving distance after a loss of tire every time the engine is started using the inflation pressure depends on cargo load, driv‐ Start/Stop button: ing style and road conditions. ▷ Front-end collision warning, refer to A vehicle with an average load has a possible page 117. driving range of approx. 50 miles/80 km. ▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 123.

116 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 117

Safety Controls

Hints Camera Personal responsibility The system does not serve as a substi‐ tute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐ cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐ dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀

Adapting your speed and driving style The displays and warnings of the system The camera is found near the interior rearview do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to mirror. adapt his or her driving speed and style to the Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ traffic conditions.◀ terior rearview mirror clean and clear.

Be alert Switching on/off Due to system limitations, warnings may be not issued at all, or may be issued late or The Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐ improperly. Therefore, always be alert and cally active after every departure. ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk Press button: the systems are turned of an accident.◀ off. The LED goes out. Tow-starting and towing Press button: the systems are turned on. The LED lights up. For tow-starting or towing, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐ Settings can be made on the Control Display. tions of the individual braking systems might lead to accidents.◀ Front-end collision warning At a glance Depending on the equipment, the collision Button in the vehicle warning system consists of one of the two sys‐ tems: ▷ Front-end collision warning with City Brak‐ ing function, refer to page 120. ▷ Front-end collision warning with braking function, refer to page 118

Intelligent Safety button

117 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 118

Controls Safety

Front-end collision warning Hints with braking function Personal responsibility The system does not serve as a substi‐ The concept tute for the driver's personal judgment of the The ystem can help prevent accidents. If an traffic situation. accident cannot be prevented, the system will Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐ help reduce the collision speed. cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐ The system sounds a warning before an immi‐ dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀ nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐ ently if needed. Adapting your speed and driving style The automatic braking intervention may be The displays and warnings of the system executed with maximum braking force and for do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to a brief period only as necessary. adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀ If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go, the front-end collision Be alert warning is controlled via the cruise control ra‐ Due to system limitations, warnings may dar sensor in conjunction with a camera. be not issued at all, or may be issued late or The front-end collision warning is available improperly. Therefore, always be alert and even if cruise control has been deactivated. ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk With the vehicle approaching another vehicle of an accident.◀ intentionally the collision warning is delayed avoiding false alarm. Tow-starting and towing For tow-starting or towing, switch off the General information Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐ The system issues a two-phase warning of a tions of the individual braking systems might possible danger of collision with vehicles at lead to accidents.◀ speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with the current driving sit‐ At a glance uation. Button in the vehicle Detection range

Intelligent Safety button It responds to objects if they are detected by the system.

118 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 119

Safety Controls

Radar sensor Setting the warning time The warning time can be set via iDrive. 1. "Settings" 2. "Frontal Coll. Warning" 3. Activate the desired time on the Control Display. The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐ rently in use.

The radar sensor is located in the lower area of Warning with braking function the front bumper. Display Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐ structed. If a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐ nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐ ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display. Camera Symbol Measure

The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐ ing. Brake and increase distance.

The vehicle flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐ ing. You are requested to intervene by The camera is found near the interior rearview braking or make an evasive maneu‐ mirror. ver. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ terior rearview mirror clean and clear. Prewarning This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the Switching on/off impending danger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small. Switching on automatically The driver must intervene actively when there The system is automatically active after every is a prewarning. driving-off. Acute warning with braking function Switch off Warning of the imminent danger of a collision when the vehicle approaches another object at Press button: the system is switched a relatively high differential speed. off. The LED goes out. The driver must intervene actively when there Re-press button: the system is switched on. is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is The LED lights up. assisted by an automatic braking intervention in a possible risk of collision.

119 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 120

Controls Safety

Acute warnings can also be triggered without Functional limitations previous prewarning. The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: Braking intervention ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐ The warning prompts the driver himself/herself fall. to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ ▷ In tight curves. ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐ ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on ▷ If the driving stability control systems are the brake pedal. The system can assist with limited or deactivated, e.g., DSC OFF. automatic braking intervention if there is risk of ▷ If, depending on the vehicle equipment a collision. The intervention can bring the vehi‐ version, the field of view of the camera in cle to a complete stop. the mirror or the radar sensor is dirty or ob‐ The braking intervention is executed only if scured. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐ and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐ gine, via the Start/Stop knob. vated. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ Above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h the braking ately after vehicle shipment. intervention occurs as a brief braking pressure. ▷ If there is constant blinding effects be‐ No automatic delay occurs. cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun The braking intervention can be interrupted by low in the sky. stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐ tively moving the steering wheel. Warning sensitivity Object detection can be restricted. Limitations The more sensitive the warning settings are, of the detection range and functional restric‐ e.g. the warning time, the more warnings are tions are to be considered. displayed. However, there may also be an ex‐ cess of false warnings. System limits

Detection range Front-end collision warning The system's detection potential is limited. with City Braking function Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐ sued late. The concept E. g. the following situations may not be de‐ The ystem can help prevent accidents. If an tected: accident cannot be prevented, the system will ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach help reduce the collision speed. them at high speed. The system sounds a warning before an immi‐ ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of nent collision and actuates brakes independ‐ you, or sharply decelerating vehicles. ently if needed. ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. The automatic braking intervention is done with limited force and duration. ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. A camera in the area of the rearview mirror controls the system.

120 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 121

Safety Controls

The front-end collision warning is available Be alert even if cruise control has been deactivated. Due to system limitations, warnings may With the vehicle approaching another vehicle be not issued at all, or may be issued late or intentionally the collision warning is delayed improperly. Therefore, always be alert and avoiding false alarm. ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.◀ General information Tow-starting and towing The system warns at two levels of an imminent danger of collision at speeds from approx. For tow-starting or towing, switch off the 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐ the current driving situation. tions of the individual braking systems might lead to accidents.◀ Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to 35 mph/60 km/h. At a glance Detection range Button in the vehicle

It responds to objects if they are detected by the system. Intelligent Safety button

121 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 122

Controls Safety

Switching on/off Prewarning This warning is issued, e.g., when there is the Switching on automatically impending danger of a collision or the distance The system is automatically active after every to the vehicle ahead is too small. driving-off. The driver must intervene actively when there is a prewarning. Switch off Press button: the system is switched Acute warning with braking function off. The LED goes out. Warning of the imminent danger of a collision Re-press button: the system is switched on. when the vehicle approaches another object at The LED lights up. a relatively high differential speed. The driver must intervene actively when there Setting the warning time is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is assisted by a minor automatic braking inter‐ The warning time can be set via iDrive. vention in a possible risk of collision. 1. "Settings" Acute warnings can also be triggered without 2. "Frontal Coll. Warning" previous prewarning. 3. Activate the desired time on the Control Braking intervention Display. The warning prompts the driver himself/herself The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐ to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ rently in use. ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐ ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on Warning with braking function the brake pedal. The system can assist with some braking intervention if there is risk of a Display collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus If a collision with a recognized vehicle is immi‐ come to a complete stop. nent a warning symbol appears in the instru‐ The braking intervention is executed only if ment cluster and in the Head-Up Display. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on Symbol Measure and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐ vated. The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐ ing. The braking intervention can be interrupted by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐ Brake and increase distance. tively moving the steering wheel. The vehicle flashes red and an Object detection can be restricted. Limitations acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐ of the detection range and functional restric‐ ing. tions are to be considered. You are requested to intervene by braking or make an evasive maneu‐ System limits ver. Detection range The system's detection potential is limited.

122 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 123

Safety Controls

Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐ The function is subdivided into the following sued late. systems: E. g. the following situations may not be de‐ ▷ During daytime: Pedestrian warning with tected: city braking function, refer to page 123 ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach ▷ At night: Night vision, refer to page 125 them at high speed. ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you, or sharply decelerating vehicles. Pedestrian warning with city ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. braking function ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. The concept Functional limitations The ystem can help prevent accidents with pe‐ destrians. The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: The system issues a warning in the city driving speed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐ ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐ lision with pedestrians and includes a braking fall. function. ▷ In tight curves. The camera in the area of the rearview mirror ▷ If the driving stability control systems are controls the system. limited or deactivated, e.g., DSC OFF. ▷ If, depending on the vehicle equipment General information version, the field of view of the camera in In daylight the system warns of possible colli‐ the mirror or the radar sensor is dirty or ob‐ sions with pedestrians at speeds from about scured. 6 mph/10 km/h to about 35 mph/60 km/h ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐ shortly before a collision the system supports gine, via the Start/Stop knob. you with a braking intervention. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ Under those circumstances it reacts to people ately after vehicle shipment. who are within the detection range of the sys‐ ▷ If there is constant blinding effects be‐ tem. cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun low in the sky. Detection range

Warning sensitivity The more sensitive the warning settings are, e.g. the warning time, the more warnings are displayed. However, there may also be an ex‐ cess of false warnings.

Pedestrian warning The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐ Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the ided into two areas. function warns of an imminent collision with pedestrians during daytime or nighttime.

123 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 124

Controls Safety

▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the At a glance vehicle. ▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and Button in the vehicle left. A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐ cated within the central area. A warning is is‐ sued about pedestrians who are located within the extended area only if they are moving in the direction of the central area.

Hints Personal responsibility Intelligent Safety button The system does not serve as a substi‐ tute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. Camera Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐ cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐ dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀

Adapting your speed and driving style The displays and warnings of the system do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀

Be alert The camera is found near the interior rearview Due to system limitations, warnings may mirror. be not issued at all, or may be issued late or Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ improperly. Therefore, always be alert and terior rearview mirror clean and clear. ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.◀ Switching on/off Tow-starting and towing Switching on automatically For tow-starting or towing, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐ The system is automatically active after every tions of the individual braking systems might driving-off. lead to accidents.◀ Switch off Press button: the systems are turned off. The LED goes out. Press button: the systems are turned on. The LED lights up.

124 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 125

Safety Controls

Warning with braking function ▷ Partially covered pedestrians. ▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such Display because of the viewing angle or contour. If a collision with a person detected in this way ▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range. is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the ▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display. 32 in/80 cm. The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐ nal sounds. Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional or may With instrument display: The red sym‐ not be available in the following situations: bol is displayed and a signal sounds. ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐ Intervene immediately by braking or make an fall. evasive maneuver. ▷ In tight curves. ▷ If the driving stability control systems are Braking intervention deactivated, e.g. DSC OFF. The warning prompts the driver himself/herself ▷ If the camera viewing field or the front to react. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ windshield are dirty or covered. ing force is used. Premise for the brake boos‐ ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐ ter is sufficiently quick and hard stepping on gine, via the Start/Stop knob. the brake pedal. The system can assist with some braking intervention if there is risk of a ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ collision. At low speeds vehicles may thus ately after vehicle shipment. come to a complete stop. ▷ If there is constant blinding effects be‐ The braking intervention is executed only if cause of oncoming light, e. g., from the sun DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on low in the sky. and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐ ▷ When it is dark outside. vated. The braking intervention can be interrupted by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐ Night Vision with Pedestrian tively moving the steering wheel. and Animal Detection Object detection can be restricted. Limitations of the detection range and functional restric‐ The concept tions are to be considered. Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detec‐ tion is a night vision system. System limits An infrared camera scans the area in front of the vehicle and issues a warning if it detects Detection range pedestrians and animals on the street. Warm The detection potential of the camera is lim‐ objects that are similar in shape to human be‐ ited. ings or animals are detected by the system. If Thus a warning might not be issued or be is‐ necessary, the heat image can be displayed on sued late. the Control Display. E. g. the following situations may not be de‐ tected:

125 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 126

Controls Safety

Heat image In addition, the system also detects animals above a certain minimum size, e.g., deer. With heat image activated on the Control Dis‐ play: People detected by the system are displayed with a slight yellow hue. Animals detected by the system are displayed in a darker yellow.

Under good ambient conditions, the object de‐ The image shows the heat radiated by objects tection operates within the following distance in the field of view of the camera. ranges: Warm objects have a light appearance and ▷ Pedestrian detection: up to approx. cold objects, a dark appearance. 330 ft/100 m The ability to detect an object depends on the ▷ Detection of large animals: up to approx. temperature difference between the object 490 ft/150 m and the background and on the level of heat ▷ Detection of medium animals: up to ap‐ radiation emitted by the object. Objects that prox. 230 ft/70 m are similar in temperature to the environment Environmental influences can limit the availa‐ or that radiate very little heat are difficult to de‐ bility of object detection. tect. If the vehicle systems detect that the vehicle is For safety reasons, when driving at speeds located in a residential area, the animal detec‐ above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambi‐ tion is temporarily switched off. ent light, the image is only displayed when the low beams are activated. Hints A still image is displayed at regular intervals for Personal responsibility a fraction of a second. Night Vision cannot replace the driver's personal judgment of the visibility conditions Pedestrian and animal detection and the traffic situation. The view ahead and the actual visibility conditions must always be the basis on which the vehicle speed is ad‐ justed; otherwise, there is a risk to road safety.◀

Object detection and warning only functions in darkness. Warm objects that are similar in shape to hu‐ man beings are detected by the system.

126 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 127

Safety Controls

Overview Press button.

Buttons in the vehicle The LED goes out.

Switching on heat image additionally The heat image from the Night Vision camera can also be displayed on the Control Display. This function has no effect on object detec‐ tion. Press button.

The image from the camera is displayed on the Intelligent Safety button Control Display.

Switch on/switch off heat image Adjustments via the iDrive With heat image switched on:

Camera 1. Press the controller. 2. Select brightness or contrast. ▷ Select the symbol. ▷ Select the symbol. 3. Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected. 4. Press the controller.

Display

The camera is automatically heated when the Warning of people or animals in external temperatures are low. danger The camera lens is automatically cleaned to‐ If a collision with a person or an animal de‐ gether with the headlights. tected in this way is imminent, a warning sym‐ bol appears on the instrument cluster and in Switching on/off the Head-up Display. Although both the shape and the heat radiation Switching on automatically are analyzed, false warnings cannot be ruled When it is dark outside, the system is automat‐ out. ically active after every driving-off.

Switch off The system is only switched off until the next time the engine is started with the Start/Stop button.

127 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 128

Controls Safety

Warning area in front of the vehicle Acute warning The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐ nal sounds.

With instrument display: The red sym‐ bol is displayed and a signal sounds.

When animals are detected, an red animal symbol is displayed with the signal tone. Red symbol in the instrument cluster. The warning area for the pedestrian warning consists of two parts: ▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the Red symbol in the instrument display. vehicle. ▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and Intervene immediately by braking or make an left. evasive maneuver. With animal warnings, no distinction is made between the central or expanded area. Display in the Head-up Display The entire area moves along with the vehicle in The warning is displayed simultane‐ the direction of the steering angle and changes ously in the Head-up Display and on with the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed the instrument cluster. The displayed increases, the area becomes longer and wider, symbol can vary with the people detected. e.g. When animals are detected, an animal symbol is displayed. Prewarning The yellow symbol is displayed when a System limits person is detected in the central area immediately in front of the vehicle. Basic limits The yellow symbol is displayed when a person System operation is limited in situations such in the extended area is moving from the right as the following: or left towards the central area. ▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in The displayed symbol can vary with the people tight curves. detected. ▷ When the camera is dirty or the protective Intervene actively by braking or make an eva‐ glass is damaged. sive maneuver. ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall.

When animals are detected, an animal ▷ At very high external temperatures. symbol is displayed. The symbol also shows the side of the road on which Limits of pedestrian and animal the animal was detected. Intervene actively by detection braking or make an evasive maneuver. In some situations, it may occur that pedes‐ trians are detected as animals or animals as pedestrians.

128 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 129

Safety Controls

Small animals are not detected by the object At a glance detection function, even if they are clearly visi‐ ble in the image. Button in the vehicle Limited detection: ▷ People or animals who are fully or partially covered, especially when their heads are covered. ▷ People who are not in an upright position, e.g., lying down. ▷ Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (e.g., recumbent bicycles). ▷ After physical damage to the system, e.g., after an accident. Lane departure warning

Lane departure warning Camera

The concept Starting at a specific speed, this system alerts you when the vehicle on streets with lane markings is about to leave the lane. This speed, depending on the country version, is between 35 mph/55 km/h and 45 mph/70 km/h. When switching on the system below this speed, a message is displayed in the instru‐ The camera is found near the interior rearview ment cluster. mirror. The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ the event of warnings. The time of the warning terior rearview mirror clean and clear. may vary depending on the current driving sit‐ uation. Switching on/off The system does not provide a warning if the Press button. turn signal is set before leaving the lane.

▷ On: the LED lights up. Hints ▷ Off: the LED goes out. Personal responsibility Settings are stored for the profile currently in The system cannot serve as a substitute use. for the driver's personal judgment of the course of the road and the traffic situation. Display in the instrument cluster In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steer‐ ▷ Lines: system is activated. ing wheel, as you may lose control of the vehi‐ cle.◀

129 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 130

Controls Safety

▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking was de‐ ▷ When the windshield in front of the interior tected and warnings can be issued. rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ ered with stickers, etc. Display in the instrument display ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ ately after vehicle shipment. ▷ Symbol orange: system is acti‐ vated. ▷ Symbol green: at least one lane Active Blind Spot Detection marking was detected and warn‐ ings can be issued. The concept

Issued warning If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐ brating. If the turn signal is set before changing the lane, a warning is not issued.

End of warning The warning ends: Two radar sensors below the rear bumper monitor the area behind and next to the vehicle ▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds. at speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h. ▷ When returning to your own lane. The system indicates whether there are vehi‐ ▷ When braking hard. cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching ▷ When using the turn signal. from behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2. The lamp in the exterior mirror housing is dim‐ System limits med. The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: Before you change lanes after setting the turn signal, the system issues a warning in the sit‐ ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. uations described above. ▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐ The lamp in the exterior mirror housing flashes ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane and the steering wheel vibrates. markings such as in construction areas. ▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, Hints ice, dirt or water. Personal responsibility ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. The system does not serve as a substi‐ ▷ When the lane markings are covered by tute for the driver's personal judgment of the objects. traffic situation. ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐ front of you. cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise acci‐ ▷ When driving toward bright lights. dents are still possible despite all warnings.◀

130 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 131

Safety Controls

At a glance Display

Button in the vehicle Lamp in the exterior mirror housing

Active Blind Spot Detection Information stage The dimmed lamp in the exterior mirror hous‐ Radar sensors ing indicates when there are vehicles in the blind spot or approaching from behind.

Warning If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly and the lamp in the exterior mirror housing flashes brightly. The warning stops when the turn signal is switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the critical zone. The radar sensors are located under the rear bumper. System limits The system may not be fully functional in the Switching on/off following situations: Press button. ▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed much faster than your own. ▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. Settings are stored for the profile currently in ▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered use. with stickers. A Check Control message is displayed when the system is not fully functional.

For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication

131 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 132

Controls Safety

Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐ ▷ PreCrash erned by the following: ▷ PostCrash FCC ID: ▷ NBG009014A. Attentiveness assistant Compliance statement: The concept This device complies with part 15 of the FCC The system can detect increasing lack of alert‐ Rules. Operation is subject to the following ness or fatigue of the driver during long, mo‐ two conditions: notonous journeys, e.g., on highways. In this ▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐ situation, it is recommended that the driver ference, and takes a break. ▷ this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may Note cause undesired operation. Personal responsibility Any unauthorized modifications or changes to The system cannot act as a substitute for these devices could void the user's authority to the personal assessment of one's physical operate this equipment. state and may not detect an increasing lack of alertness or fatigue or may not detect it cor‐ rectly. Therefore, make sure that the driver is Brake force display rested and alert; otherwise, risks may be de‐ tected too late and an accident be caused as a The concept result.◀

Function The system is activated each time the engine is started and cannot be switched off. After travel has begun, the system is trained about the driver, so that increasing lack of alertness or fatigue can be detected. This procedure takes the following criteria into account: ▷ During normal brake application, the outer brake lights light up. ▷ Personal driving style, e.g., steering behav‐ ior. ▷ During heavy brake application, the inner brake lights light up in addition. ▷ Driving conditions, e.g., length of trip. Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the system is active and can display a recommen‐ Active Protection dation to take a break. Break recommendation General information If the driver becomes increasingly less alert or The Active Protection safety package consists fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control of systems that are independent of each other: Display with the recommendation to take a ▷ Attentiveness assistant. break.

132 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 133

Safety Controls

A recommendation to take a break is displayed Note only once during an uninterrupted trip. Personal responsibility After a break, another recommendation to take The system cannot possibly serve as a a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐ substitute for the driver's personal judgment of mately 45 minutes. the traffic situation. The system may not al‐ ways detect critical situations reliably and in a System limits timely manner. Adapt speed to traffic situation The function may be limited in the following and drive alertly; otherwise, a risk to safety may situations, for instance, and will either output result.◀ an incorrect warning or no warning at all: ▷ When the clock is set incorrectly. Function ▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below After the safety belt is buckled, the front belts about 43 mph/70 km/h. are automatically pretensioned once after the ▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during vehicle is driven is away. rapid acceleration or when cornering fast. In critical driving situations, the following indi‐ ▷ In active driving situations, such as when vidual functions become active as needed: changing lanes frequently. ▷ The front belts are automatically preten‐ ▷ When the road surface is poor. sioned. ▷ In the event of strong side winds. ▷ Automatic closing of the windows. ▷ Automatic Positioning of the backrest for PreCrash the front passenger seat. After a critical driving situation without an acci‐ The concept dent, the front belts are loosened again. All With this system critical driving situations that other systems can be restored to the desired might result in an accident can be detected setting. above a speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. In If the belt tension does not loosen automati‐ these situations, preventive measures are au‐ cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the belt tomatically taken to minimize the risk of an ac‐ using the red button in the buckle. Fasten the cident as much as possible. belt before continuing on your trip. Critical driving situations may include: Emergency stop. PostCrash If the vehicle includes the front-end collision In the event of an accident, the system can warning or front-end collision warning with bring the car to a halt automatically without in‐ braking feature, impending collisions with vehi‐ tervention by the driver in certain situations. cles driving ahead or stopped in front of you This can reduce the risk of a further collision can also be detected within the system's and the consequences thereof. range. Depressing the brake pedal can cause the ve‐ hicle to brake harder. This interrupts automatic braking. Destepping on the gas pedal also in‐ terrupts automatic braking. After coming to a halt, the brake is released automatically. Secure the vehicle against roll‐ ing.

133 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 134

Controls Driving stability control systems

Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and options Drive-off assistant This chapter describes all standard, country- This system supports driving off on inclines. specific and optional features offered with the The parking brake is not required. series. It also describes features that are not 1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to brake. the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and 2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐ systems. The respectively applicable country out delay. provisions must be observed when using the After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is respective features and systems. held in place for approx. 2 seconds. Depending on the vehicle load, the vehicle may roll back slightly. Antilock Brake System ABS Driving off without delay ABS prevents locking of the wheels during After releasing the foot brake, start driv‐ braking. ing without delay, since the drive-off assistant The vehicle contains its steering power even will not hold the vehicle in place for more than during full brake applications, thus increasing approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin to active safety. roll back.◀ ABS is operational every time you start the en‐ gine. DSC Dynamic Stability Control Brake assistant When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system The concept automatically produces the greatest possible DSC prevents traction loss in the power braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐ wheels when driving off and accelerating. tance to a minimum during emergency stop. DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐ This system utilizes all of the benefits provided tions such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Within by ABS. the physical limits DSC helps to keep the vehi‐ Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal cle on a steady course by reducing engine for the duration of the emergency stop. speed and by applying brakes to the individual wheels.

Adaptive brake assistant Note In combination with the Active Cruise Control, Adjust your driving style to the situation this system ensures that the brakes respond An appropriate driving style is always the even more rapidly when braking in critical sit‐ responsibility of the driver. uations. The laws of physics cannot be repealed, not even with DSC.

134 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 135

Driving stability control systems Controls

Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety Deactivating DSC margin by driving in a risky manner.◀ Press and hold this button but not lon‐ Do not deactivate DSC when driving with ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the roof load indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐ strument cluster and displays DSC OFF. Do not deactivate Dynamic Stability Control DSC when driving with roof load, e.g. roof- The DSC system is switched off. mounted luggage rack. The steering and, depending on the equip‐ Otherwise, driving safety is not given in driv‐ ment, suspension are tuned for sporty driving. ing-critical situation due to the elevated center of gravity.◀ Activating DSC Press button. Overview DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator Button in the vehicle lamp go out.

Indicator/warning lights When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is deactivated.

DTC Dynamic Traction DSC OFF button Control

Indicator/warning lights The concept The DTC system is a version of the DSC where The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐ forward momentum is optimized. trols the drive and braking forces. The system ensures maximum headway on The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has special road conditions or loose road surfaces, failed. e.g., unplowed snowy roads, but with some‐ what limited driving stability. Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is provides maximum traction. Driving stability is reduced during acceleration and when driving limited during acceleration and when driving in in curves. curves. Stabilizing interventions by the Integral Active Therefore drive with appropriate caution. Steering system are only performed by the You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC rear axle steering. under the following special circumstances: To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC ▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, again as soon as possible. snow-covered roads.

135 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 136

Controls Driving stability control systems

▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or brakes, the vehicle moves at slightly more than driving off from loose grounds. walking speed. ▷ When driving with snow chains. Hill Descent Control can be activated at speeds below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic driving downhill, the vehicle reduces its speed Traction Control to approx. walking speed and then keeps its speed constant. Activating DTC As long as there is active braking, the system Press button. is on standby. The system does not brake the vehicle during this time. TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC Only use HDC in low gears or in selector lever OFF lights up. position D or R.

Increasing or decreasing vehicle Deactivating DTC speed Press button again. Specify desired speed in the range from ap‐ TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐ prox. 4 mph/6 km/h to approx. 15 mph/25 km/h tor lamp go out. using the rocker switch of the cruise control on the steering wheel. Vehicle speed can be changed by lightly accelerating. Indicator/warning lights If DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayed in the instrument cluster. The indicator lamp lights up: DTC Dy‐ namic Traction Control is activated.

xDrive

xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐ ▷ Press the rocker switch up to the point of hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC resistance: the speed increases gradually. further optimize traction and driving dynamics. ▷ Press up the rocker switch past the point The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis‐ of resistance: the speed increases while tributes the drive forces to the front and rear the rocker switch is pressed. axles as demanded by the driving situation and road surface. ▷ Press the rocker switch down to the point of resistance: the speed decreases gradu‐ ally. HDC Hill Descent Control ▷ Press the rocker switch down past the point of resistance: when driving forward, The concept the speed decreases to approx. HDC is a downhill driving assistant that auto‐ 6 mph/10 km/h; when reversing, the speed matically controls vehicle speed on steep decreases to approx. 4 mph/6 km/h. downhill gradients. Without applying the

136 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 137

Driving stability control systems Controls

Activating HDC Dynamic Drive

The concept The system reduces the lateral inclination of the vehicle that occurs during rapid driving in curves or during quick evasive maneuvers. Driving stability and driving comfort are in‐ creased under all driving conditions. The sys‐ tem utilizes active stabilizer bars on the front and rear axles that react immediately to all driv‐ Press button; the LED above the button ing situations. lights up. Programs The system offers two different programs. Deactivating HDC Select the programs via the Driving Dynamics Press button again and the LED goes Control, refer to page 138. out. HDC is automatically deactivated above approx. 37 mph/60 km/h. SPORT Sporty tuning for greater driving agility. Display in the instrument cluster The selected speed is displayed COMFORT in the speedometer. Comfort-oriented tuning for optimal comfort. ▷ Green: the system is actively braking the vehicle. ▷ Orange: the system is on Dynamic Damping Control standby. The concept This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐ Malfunction tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐ A message is displayed in the instrument clus‐ eling on uneven road surfaces. ter. HDC is not available, e.g., due to elevated The system enhances driving dynamics and brake temperatures. comfort fitting road surface and driving style.

Programs Adaptive Drive The system offers several different programs. The concept Select the programs via the Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 138. Adaptive Drive includes the following systems: ▷ Dynamic Drive, refer to page 137. SPORT/SPORT+ ▷ Dynamic Damping Control, refer to Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐ page 137. sorbers for greater driving agility. The system increases driving stability and driv‐ ing comfort.

137 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 138

Controls Driving stability control systems

COMFORT/ECO PRO 2. Have the system checked if the warning Balanced tuning. lamp does not go out after moving the steering wheel approx. 6 times or if the COMFORT+ steering wheel is at an angle. Comfort-oriented tuning of the shock absorb‐ Using snow chains ers for optimal traveling comfort. Note Integral Active Steering When snow chains are in use, refer to page 211, rear wheel steering is deactivated. The concept Programs Integral Active Steering is a combination of Ac‐ The system offers several different programs. tive Steering and rear axle steering. Select the programs via the Driving Dynamics Active Steering varies the steering angle of the Control, refer to page 138. wheels in relation to the steering wheel move‐ ment as a function of the speed. SPORT At speeds up to approx. 37 mph/60 km/h, e.g., Consistently sporty tuning of the Integral Ac‐ in curves, the steering angle is increased, i.e., tive Steering for greater driving agility. steering becomes more direct. The rear axle steering acts to increase maneu‐ Malfunction verability by turning the rear wheels slightly in In the event of a malfunction, the steering a direction opposite to the front wheels. wheel must be turned further, while the vehicle At higher speeds, the steering angle is increas‐ responds more sensitively to steering wheel ingly reduced. movements in the higher speed range. The rear wheels are turned to the same angle The stability-enhancing intervention may be as the front wheels. deactivated. In critical situations, Integral Active Steering Proceed cautiously and drive defensively. can specifically steer the front and rear wheels Have the system checked. to stabilize the vehicle before the driver inter‐ venes, e.g., when braking where road condi‐ tions differ on the left and right sides of the ve‐ hicle. Driving Dynamics Control

Initializing The concept In rare cases, it may become necessary to initi‐ The Driving Dynamics Control can be used to alize the Integral Active Steering. adjust the driving dynamics of the vehicle. For this purpose various programs are available for The warning lamp lights up. A Check selection that are activated via the two buttons Control message is displayed. of the Driving Dynamics Control and the DSC 1. With the engine running, turn the steering OFF-button. wheel all the way to the left and right sev‐ eral times in a uniform manner until the warning lamp disappears.

138 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 139

Driving stability control systems Controls

Overview To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible. Button in the vehicle Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF Press and hold this button but not lon‐ ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐ strument cluster and displays DSC OFF. The DSC system is switched off.

Activating DSC Press button. Operating the programs DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator lamp go out. Press button Program

DSC OFF Indicator/warning lights TRACTION When DSC OFF is activated, DSC OFF is dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. SPORT+ SPORT The indicator lamp lights up: DSC OFF is activated. COMFORT COMFORT+ TRACTION ECO PRO Maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. Driv‐ Automatic program change ing stability is limited during acceleration and The system may automatically switch to COM‐ when driving in curves. FORT in the following situations: ▷ Failure of Integral Active Steering. Activating TRACTION ▷ Failure of Dynamic Damping Control. Press button. ▷ Failure of DSC Dynamic Stability Control. TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐ ▷ The vehicle has a flat tire. ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up. ▷ When activating cruise control in TRAC‐ TION or DSC OFF mode. Deactivating TRACTION DSC OFF Press button again. Driving stability is limited during acceleration TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐ and when driving in curves. tor lamp go out. Stabilizing interventions by the Integral Active Steering system are only performed by the rear axle steering.

139 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 140

Controls Driving stability control systems

Indicator/warning lights Activating SPORT If TRACTION is activated, TRACTION is dis‐ Press button repeatedly until SPORT played in the instrument cluster. is displayed in the instrument cluster. The indicator lamp lights up: TRAC‐ TION is activated. Configuring SPORT When the display is activated on the Control SPORT+ Display, refer to page 141, the SPORT driving Sporty driving with optimized suspension and mode can be set. adapted engine control with limited driving sta‐ After the SPORT driving mode is activated, se‐ bilization. lect "Configure SPORT" on the displayed Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. panel and configure the program. The driver handles several of the stabilization SPORT can also be configured before it is acti‐ tasks. vated: 1. "Settings" Activating SPORT+ 2. "SPORT mode" or: "Driving mode" Press button repeatedly until SPORT+ 3. Configure driving mode. appears in the instrument cluster and This configuration is retrieved when the the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up. SPORT driving mode is activated.

Automatic program change COMFORT When switching on the adjustable speed limit For a balanced tuning with maximum driving or activating cruise control, the program auto‐ stabilization. matically switches to SPORT mode. Activating COMFORT Indicator/warning lights Press button repeatedly until COM‐ SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster. FORT is displayed in the instrument The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up: cluster. Dynamic Traction Control is activated. In certain situations, the system automatically changes to the NORMAL program, automatic SPORT program change, refer to page 139. Consistently sporty tuning of the suspension and engine control for greater driving agility COMFORT+ with maximum driving stabilization. Comfort-oriented tuning of the shock absorb‐ The program can be configured to individual ers and adapted engine control for optimal specifications. traveling comfort with maximum driving stabili‐ zation. The configuration is stored for the profile cur‐ rently in use. COMFORT+ activation Press button repeatedly until COM‐ FORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster.

140 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 141

Driving stability control systems Controls

ECO PRO Display on the Control Display ECO PRO, refer to page 186, provides consis‐ Program changes can be displayed briefly on tent tuning to minimize fuel consumption for the Control Display. maximum range with maximum driving stabili‐ To do so, make the following settings: zation. 1. "Settings" Comfort functions and the engine controller are adjusted. 2. "Control display" The program can be configured to individual "Driving mode" specifications. 3. "Driving mode info"

Activating ECO PRO Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Configuring ECO PRO 1. Activate ECO PRO. 2. "Configure ECO PRO" Make the desired settings.

Configure driving mode Settings can be made for the following driving modes in Driving mode: ▷ SPORT mode, refer to page 140. ▷ ECO PRO mode, refer to page 187.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Selected program The instrument cluster displays the selected program.

Program selection Pressing the button displays a list of the selectable programs. Depending on your vehicle's op‐ tional features, the list in the in‐ strument cluster can differ from the illustration shown.

141 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 142

Controls Driving comfort

Driving comfort

Vehicle features and options As soon as the road is clear, the vehicle accel‐ erates to the desired speed. This chapter describes all standard, country- The speed is also maintained downhill, but specific and optional features offered with the may not be maintained uphill if engine power is series. It also describes features that are not insufficient. necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This General information also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country Depending on the driving settings, the features provisions must be observed when using the of the cruise control can change in certain respective features and systems. areas.

Hints Active Cruise Control with Personal responsibility Stop & Go function, ACC Even an active system holds the driver responsible for his or her driving, particularly The concept for staying in your lane, adjusting your speed, Use this system to select a desired speed that keeping your distance and for your driving the vehicle will maintain automatically on clear style all in relation to traffic. roads. Technically the system has its limits, it cannot To the extent possible, the system automati‐ independently react to all traffic situations. cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle Monitor your driving, be on the alert, observe ahead of you. the vehicle surroundings and other traffic and The distance that the vehicle maintains to the react when needed, e.g. through braking, vehicle ahead of you can be varied. steering or make evasive maneuvers - risk of accident.◀ For safety reasons, it depends on the speed. To maintain a certain distance, the system au‐ Unfavorable weather conditions tomatically reduces the speed, applies the In the event of unfavorable weather and brakes lightly, or accelerates again if the vehi‐ light conditions, e. g. if there is rain, snowfall, cle ahead begins moving faster. slush, fog or glare, this may result in poorer If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and recognition of vehicles as well as short-term then proceeds to drive again within a brief pe‐ interruptions for vehicles that are already de‐ riod, the system is able to detect this within the tected. Drive attentively, and react to the cur‐ given system limits. Your own vehicle will rent traffic situation. Intervene actively when brake automatically and then accelerate again. necessary, e.g., by braking, steering or making If the vehicle ahead of you drives away again an evasive maneuver, otherwise, there is the after a prolonged period, briefly press the ac‐ risk of an accident.◀ celerator pedal or press the appropriate button to reactivate the system. The vehicle will auto‐ matically accelerate.

142 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 143

Driving comfort Controls

Before leaving the vehicle, secure it against moving on its own. Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐ ning: set the parking brake and ensure that the Steptronic transmission is in position P. Other‐ wise, the vehicle may begin to move.◀

At a glance

Buttons on the steering wheel A dirty or covered sensor may prevent the de‐ tection of vehicles. Press but‐ Function ▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐ ton move layers of snow and ice carefully. Cruise control on/off, interrupt, ▷ Do not cover the view field of the radar refer to page 143 sensor. Store/maintain speed, refer to Camera page 144

Resume speed, refer to page 145

Reduce distance, refer to page 145

Increase distance, refer to page 145

rocker switch: Maintain, store, change speed, The camera is found near the interior rearview refer to page 144 mirror. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ terior rearview mirror clean and clear. Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's series, optional features and country specifica‐ A dirty or covered area in front of the interior tions. mirror may hinder the detection of vehicles. If necessary, clean the area in front of the inte‐ Radar sensor rior mirror, e.g., carefully remove salt residue in A radar sensor is located in the front bumper the winter. for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the vehicle. Switching on/off and interrupting cruise control

Switching on Press button on the steering wheel.

143 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 144

Controls Driving comfort

The indicator lights in the instrument cluster ▷ If the detection range of the radar is dis‐ light up and the mark in the speedometer is set rupted, e.g., by dirt or heavy fog. to the current speed. Cruise control can be used. Maintaining, storing, and changing the speed Switch off Hints Deactivated or interrupted system Adjusting the desired speed With deactivated or interrupted system use your brakes, steering and moves as usual Modify desired speed to road conditions to avoid the chance of an accident.◀ and be ready to brake at all times; otherwise, there is the risk of an accident.◀ To switch off the system while standing, step on brake pedal at the same time. Differences in speed Press button on the steering wheel. Large differences in speed relative to other vehicles cannot be compensated by the system such as in the following situations: ▷ If active: press twice. ▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving ▷ If interrupted: press once. vehicle. The displays go out. The stored desired speed ▷ When another vehicle suddenly swerves is deleted. into the wrong lane. Interrupting ▷ When stationary objects are approached at high speed.◀ Press button on the steering wheel. Maintaining/storing the speed If interrupting the system while stationary, Press button. press on the brake pedal at the same time. Or: The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations: ▷ When the brakes are applied. ▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐ gaged. ▷ When DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated or DSC is deactivated. ▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability. ▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving Dynamics Control. Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐ ▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are terrupted. opened while the vehicle is standing still. ▷ If the system has not detected objects for When the system is switched on, the current an extended period, e.g., on a road with speed is maintained and stored as the desired very little traffic without curb or shoulder speed. markings.

144 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 145

Driving comfort Controls

This is displayed in the speedometer and Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐ briefly in the instrument cluster. Displays in the tance, refer to page 146. instrument cluster, refer to page 146. When cruise control is maintained or stored, Calling up the desired speed and DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be turned distance on if needed. While driving Changing the speed Press button with the system Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly switched on. until the desired speed is set. In the following cases, the stored speed value If active, the displayed speed is stored and the is deleted and cannot be called up again: vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear. ▷ When the system is switched off. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to ▷ When the ignition is switched off. the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. While standing 1 mph/1 km/h. The system brought the vehicle to a complete ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed standstill: past the point of resistance, the desired ▷ Green marking in the speedometer: speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐ Your vehicle accelerates automatically as mum of 5 mph/10 km/h. soon as the vehicle in the range of the ra‐ Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the dar sensor moves off. action. ▷ Speedometer markings turn orange: no au‐ tomatic driving off. Distance To accelerate to the desired speed auto‐ Select a distance matically, press the accelerator or press Adjust the distance according to the traf‐ the RES or SET button. fic and weather conditions; otherwise, there is Rolling bars in the distance display indicate the risk of an accident. Maintain the prescribed that the the vehicle detected by the radar sen‐ safety distance.◀ sor has driven off. Your vehicle was brought down to a halt Reduce distance through stepping on the brake pedal and it is standing behind another vehicle: Press button repeatedly until the de‐ sired distance is set. 1. Press button to call up a stored Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐ desired speed. tance, refer to page 146. 2. Release the brake pedal. Increase distance 3. Step on the accelerator briefly, or press the RES rocker switch when the vehicle ahead Press button repeatedly until the de‐ of you drives away. sired distance is set.

145 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 146

Controls Driving comfort

Displays in the instrument cluster Distance display

Desired speed The system has been interrupted or distance control is temporarily sup‐ ▷ The marking lights up green: pressed because the accelerator the system is active. pedal is being pressed; a vehicle ▷ The marking lights up or‐ was not detected. ange: the system has been interrupted. Distance control is temporarily sup‐ pressed because the accelerator ▷ The marking does not light up: the system pedal is being pressed; a vehicle is switched off. was detected.

With instrument display: the symbol is Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven displayed in the speedometer similarly away. to the mark for the desired speed. ACC is no longer accelerating. To accelerate further, activate ACC by briefly stepping on Brief status display the accelerator pedal, pressing the RES but‐ ton or rocker switch. Selected desired speed.

Indicator/warning lights If --- appears briefly on the display for Check Personal responsibility Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐ tem requirements are currently not ready for The indicator and warning lights do not operations. relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her desired driving speed and style to Distance to vehicle ahead of you the traffic conditions.◀ Shown is selected distance to the vehicle driv‐ The vehicle symbol lights up orange: ing ahead of you. A vehicle has been detected ahead of Distance display you.

Distance 1 The vehicle symbol flashes orange: The conditions are not adequate for the system to work. Distance 2 The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively resume control by Distance 3 pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.

Distance 4 The vehicle symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: This value is set after the system is switched on. You are requested to intervene by braking or make an evasive maneuver.

146 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 147

Driving comfort Controls

Displays in the Head-up Display Limited detection potential Some system information can also be dis‐ Because of the limited possible detec‐ played in the Head-up Display. tion, you should be alert at all times so that you can intervene if needed; otherwise, there is the Distance information risk of an accident.◀ The symbol is displayed when the dis‐ tance from the vehicle traveling ahead Deceleration is too short. The system does not decelerate for: ▷ Active Cruise Control switched off. ▷ Pedestrians or similar slow-moving road ▷ Display in the Head-up Display selected, users. refer to page 99. ▷ Red traffic lights. ▷ Distance too short. ▷ Cross traffic. ▷ Speed greater than approx. ▷ Oncoming traffic. 40 mph/70 km/h. Swerving vehicles System limits

Speed range The system is best used on well-constructed roads. The minimum speed that can be set is 20 mph/30 km/h. The maximum speed that can be set depends on the vehicle. The system can also be activated when sta‐ tionary. A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected Comply with the legal speed limit in every sit‐ until it is completely within the same lane as uation when using the system. your vehicle.

Detection range Swerving vehicles If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly swerves into your lane, the system may not be able to automatically restore the selected dis‐ tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐ ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g., when rapidly approaching a truck. When a ve‐ hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out evasive maneu‐ vers, if needed. You must react yourself; other‐ The detection lidacity of the system and the wise, there is the risk of an accident.◀ automatic braking lidacity are limited. Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not be detected.

147 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 148

Controls Driving comfort

Cornering Radar sensor

For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐ erned by the following: FCC ID: ▷ OAYARS3-A Compliance statement: If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the This device complies with part 15 of the FCC speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐ Rules. Operation is subject to the following not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive two conditions: into a curve at an appropriate speed. ▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐ In tight curves the system offers only restricted ference, and detection where a vehicle ahead of you might be detected late or not at all. ▷ this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment.

Malfunction The system cannot be activated if the radar sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be caused by damage incurred during parking, When you approach a curve the system may e.g. briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to A Check Control message is displayed if the the bend of the curve. If the system deceler‐ system fails. ates you may compensate it by briefly acceler‐ ating. The function for detecting and responding when approaching stationary vehicles may be After releasing the gas pedal the system is re‐ limited in the following situations: activated and controls speed independently. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ ately after vehicle shipment. Driving away ▷ If the camera is malfunctioning or dirty. A In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off Check Control message is displayed. automatically; for example: ▷ On steep inclines. ▷ From behind bumps in the road. In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.

148 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 149

Driving comfort Controls

Cruise control Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's series, optional features and country specifica‐ The concept tions. The system maintains a preset speed via the Switching on buttons on the steering wheel. The system brakes on downhill gradients if engine braking Press button on the steering wheel. is insufficient. The marking in the speedometer is set to the General information current speed. Depending on the driving settings, the features The cruise control can be used. of the cruise control can change in certain areas. Switch off

Hints Deactivated or interrupted system With deactivated or interrupted system Unfavorable conditions use your brakes, steering and moves as usual Do not use the system if unfavorable to avoid the chance of an accident.◀ conditions make it impossible to drive at a con‐ stant speed, e.g.: Press button on the steering wheel. ▷ On winding roads. ▷ If active: press twice. ▷ In heavy traffic. ▷ If interrupted: press once. ▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or on a loose road surface. The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted. Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehi‐ cle and cause an accident.◀ Interrupting Controls When active, press the button.

Overview The system is automatically interrupted if: ▷ The brakes are applied. Press but‐ Function ▷ Selector lever position D is disengaged. ton ▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated Cruise control on/off, interrupt, or DSC is deactivated. refer to page 149 ▷ DSC is actively controlling stability. Store/maintain speed, refer to ▷ HDC is activated. page 150 ▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving Resume speed, refer to Dynamics Control. page 150

rocker switch: Maintain, store, change speed, refer to page 150

149 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 150

Controls Driving comfort

Maintaining, storing, and changing the increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/ speed km/ ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed Hints past the point of resistance, the desired Adjusting the desired speed speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐ mum of 5 mph/10 km/h. Modify desired speed to road conditions and be ready to brake at all times; otherwise, The maximum speed that can be set de‐ there is the risk of an accident.◀ pends on the vehicle. ▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐ Maintaining/storing the speed ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐ celerates the vehicle without requiring Press button. pressure on the accelerator pedal. Or: After the rocker switch is released, the ve‐ hicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the resistance point causes the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.

Resuming the desired speed Press button.

The stored speed is reached and maintained.

Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐ Displays in the instrument cluster terrupted. Indicator lamp When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐ speed. ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐ This is displayed, refer to page 150, in the ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐ speedometer and briefly in the instrument tem is switched on. cluster. When cruise control is maintained or stored, Desired speed DSC Dynamic Stability Control will be turned ▷ The marking lights up green: on if needed. the system is active. ▷ The marking lights up or‐ Changing the speed ange: the system has been Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly interrupted. until the desired speed is set. ▷ The marking does not light up: the system If active, the displayed speed is stored and the is switched off. vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear. With instrument display: the symbol is ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to displayed in the speedometer similarly the point of resistance, the desired speed to the mark for the desired speed.

150 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 151

Driving comfort Controls

Brief status display Hints Selected desired speed. Personal responsibility Even an active system does not relieve the driver from personal responsibility while If --- appears briefly on the display for Check driving. Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐ tem requirements are currently not ready for Technically the system has its limits, it cannot operations. independently react to all traffic situations. Monitor your driving, be on the alert, observe Displays in the Head-up Display the vehicle surroundings and other traffic and Some system information can also be dis‐ react when needed - risk of accident.◀ played in the Head-up Display. Avoid driving fast with PDC Avoid approaching an object too fast. PDC Park Distance Control Avoid driving off fast while PDC is not yet ac‐ tive. The concept For technical reasons, the system may other‐ PDC is a support when parking. When you wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀ slowly approach an object in the rear - or also in the front of the vehicle if the feature is availa‐ Overview ble - then the object is reported through: ▷ Signal tones. With front PDC: button in vehicle ▷ Visual display.

General information Ultrasound sensors in the bumpers measure the distances from objects. The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐ stacle and environmental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m. An acoustic warning is first given: PDC Park Distance Control ▷ By the front sensors and the two rear cor‐ ner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm. ▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx. Switching on/off 5 ft/1.50 m. To ensure full functionality: Switching on automatically ▷ Do not cover sensors, e.g., with stickers, With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐ bicycle racks. tion P R. ▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. Automatic deactivation during forward ▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not travel spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm. The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded.

151 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 152

Controls Driving comfort

Switch the system back on if needed. Visual warning The approach of the vehicle to an object can With front PDC: switching on/off be shown on the Control Display. Objects that manually are farther away are already displayed on the Press button. Control Display before a signal sounds. A display appears as soon as Park Distance ▷ On: the LED lights up. Control (PDC) is activated. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. The range of the sensors is represented in the colors green, yellow and red. Display When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐ played, the reel can be made to PDC: Signal tones "Rear view camera" When approaching an object, an intermittent sound indicates the position of the object. E. g. System limits if an object is detected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear Limits of ultrasonic measurement speaker. Ultrasonic measuring might not function under The shorter the distance to the object, the the following circumstances: shorter the intervals. ▷ For small children and animals. If the distance to a detected object is less than ▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g. approx. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone is coats. sounded. ▷ With external interference of the ultra‐ With front PDC: if objects are located both in sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud front of and behind the vehicle, an alternating machines. continuous signal is sounded. ▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐ An interval tone is interrupted with the appro‐ aged or out of position. priate equipment after about 3 seconds: ▷ Under certain weather conditions such as ▷ If the vehicle stops in front of an object that high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐ is detected by only one of the corner sen‐ treme heat or strong wind. sors. ▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other ▷ If moving parallel to a wall. vehicles. The signal tone is switched off, when selector ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. lever position P is engaged on vehicles with Steptronic transmission. ▷ With moving objects. ▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as Volume ledges or cargo. The volume of the PDC signal tone can be ad‐ ▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges. justed similar to the sound and volume set‐ ▷ With objects with a fine surface structure tings of the radio. such as fences. Settings are stored for the profile currently in ▷ For objects with porous surfaces. use.

152 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 153

Driving comfort Controls

Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can Surround View move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. The concept Surround View comprises various camera as‐ False warnings sistance systems that help the driver when PDC may issue a warning under the following parking, maneuvering, and at complex exits conditions even though there is no obstacle and intersections. within the detection range: ▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 153 ▷ In heavy rain. ▷ Side View, refer to page 156. ▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered ▷ Top View, refer to page 157. with ice. ▷ When sensors are covered in snow. ▷ On rough road surfaces. Rearview camera ▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps. The concept ▷ In large buildings with right angles and The rearview camera provides assistance in smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga‐ parking and maneuvering backwards. The area rages. behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Display. ▷ In automatic car washes. ▷ Through heavy pollution. Hints ▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g., Check the traffic situation as well sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners or neon lights. Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐ Malfunction dent could result from road users or objects that are not lidtured by the camera.◀ A Check Control message is displayed. The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded At a glance area on the Control Display. PDC has failed. Have the system checked. Button in the vehicle To ensure full functionality: ▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. ▷ dimmedDo not put any stickers on sen‐ sors. ▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.

Rearview camera

153 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 154

Controls Driving comfort

Camera Switching the view via iDrive With PDC activated or Top View switched on: "Rear view camera" The rearview camera image is displayed.

Display on the Control Display

Functional requirement ▷ The rearview camera is switched on. ▷ The trunk lid is fully closed. The camera lens is located under the BMW emblem of the tail gate. The image quality may Activating assistance functions be impaired by dirt. The camera calibrates it‐ self regularly after the system has been More than one assistance function can be ac‐ switched off. This is why the emblem on the tive at the same time. tailgate remains open after the system has ▷ Parking aid lines been deactivated and while driving. The em‐ "Parking aid lines" blem closes automatically as soon as calibra‐ tion is complete. Lanes and turning radius are indicated. Clean the camera lens, refer to page 236. ▷ Obstacle marking "Obstacle marking" Switching on/off Spatially-shaped markings are displayed.

Switching on automatically Pathway lines With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐ tion P R. The rearview camera image is displayed if the system was switched on via the iDrive.

Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. ▷ Pathway lines can be superimposed on the Switch the system back on if needed. image of the rearview camera. Switching on/off manually ▷ They help you to estimate how much space is needed when parking and maneu‐ Press button. vering on level pavement. ▷ They are dependent on the current steer‐ ▷ On: the LED lights up. ing angle and are continuously adjusted to ▷ Off: the LED goes out. the steering wheel movements. The PDC is shown on the Control Display.

154 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 155

Driving comfort Controls

Turning circle lines Parking using pathway and turning radius lines 1. Position the vehicle so that the turning ra‐ dius lines lead to within the limits of the parking space.

▷ Turning circle lines can only be superim‐ posed on the rearview camera image to‐ gether with pathway lines. ▷ They show the course of the smallest pos‐ sible turning radius on a level road. 2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where ▷ Only one turning radius line is displayed af‐ the pathway line covers the corresponding ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer‐ turning radius line. tain angle.

Obstacle marking

Display settings

Brightness Obstacle markings can be faded into the image With the rearview camera switched on: of the rearview camera. 1. Select the symbol. Their colored margins match the markings of the PDC. This simplifies estimation of the dis‐ 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting tance to the object shown. is reached, and press the controller.

Contrast With the rearview camera switched on:

1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller.

155 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 156

Controls Driving comfort

System limits At a glance

Detection of objects Button in the vehicle Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected by the system. Assistance functions also take into account data of the PDC. Follow instructions in the PDC chapter, refer to page 151. The objects displayed on the Control Display under certain circumstances are closer than they appear. Do not estimate the distance from Side View the objects on the display.

Cameras Side View

The concept Side View provides an early look at cross traffic at blind driveways and intersections. Road users concealed by obstacles to the left and right of the vehicle can only be detected rela‐ tively late from the driver's seat. To improve visibility, two cameras in the front of the vehi‐ cle record the traffic situation on each side. Two cameras integrated in the bumpers cap‐ ture the image. Hints The two camera lenses are located on the The images from both cameras are shown si‐ sides of the bumper. multaneously on the Control Display. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. Check the traffic situation as well Clean the camera lenses, refer to page 236. Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ hicle on blind driveways and intersections with Switching on/off your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could result from road users or objects located out‐ Switching on/off manually side the picture area of the Side View cam‐ eras.◀ Press button.

Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded.

156 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 157

Driving comfort Controls

Switch the system back on if needed. General information The image is lidtured by two cameras Display integrated in the exterior mirrors and by the The traffic area to the left and right is displayed rearview camera. on the Control Display. The range is at least 7 ft/2 m to the side and rear. In this way, obstacles up to the height of the exterior mirrors are detected early.

Hints Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐ dent could result from road users or objects Guidelines at the bottom of the image show that are not lidtured by the camera.◀ the position of the front of the vehicle.

Overview Brightness With the Side View switched on: Button in the vehicle 1. "Brightness" 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller.

Contrast With the Side View switched on:

1. "Contrast" 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller. Top View

System limits The cameras lidture a maximum range of 330 ft/100 m.

Top View

The concept Top View provides assistance in parking and maneuvering. The area around the doors and the road area around the vehicle are shown on the Control Display for this purpose.

157 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 158

Controls Driving comfort

Cameras When the distance to an object is small, a red bar is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in the PDC display.

The lenses of the Top View camera are located at the bottom in the mirror housings. The im‐ age quality may be impaired by dirt. The display appears as soon as Top View is Clean the camera lenses, refer to page 236. activated. When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐ Switching on/off played, it is possible to reel to top view: "Rear view camera" Switching on automatically With the engine running, engage lever in posi‐ Brightness tion P R. With Top View switched on: The Top View and PDC images are displayed if 1. Select the symbol. the system is switched on via iDrive. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting Automatic deactivation during forward is reached, and press the controller. travel Contrast The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. With Top View switched on: Switch the system back on if needed. 1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting Switching on/off manually is reached, and press the controller. Press button. Displaying the turning radius and ▷ On: the LED lights up. pathway lines ▷ Off: the LED goes out. ▷ The static, red turning radius line shows the space needed to the side of the vehicle Top View is displayed. when the steering wheel is turned all the way. Display ▷ The variable, green pathway line assists Visual warning you in assessing the amount of space ac‐ tually needed to the side of the vehicle. The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display. The lane line depends on the engaged gear and the current steering angle. The

158 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 159

Driving comfort Controls

track line is continuously adjusted for the Hints steering wheel movement. Personal responsibility "Parking aid lines" Even an active system does not relieve Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed. the driver from personal responsibility while driving. System limits Technically the system has its limits, it cannot Top View cannot be used in the following sit‐ independently react to all traffic situations. uations: Monitor your driving, be on the alert, observe ▷ With a door open. the vehicle surroundings and other traffic and ▷ With the trunk lid open. react when needed - risk of accident.◀

▷ With an exterior mirror folded in. Changes to the parking space ▷ In poor light. Changes to the parking space after it was A Check Control message is displayed in some measured are not taken into account by the of these situations. system. Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐ vene; otherwise, there is the risk of an acci‐ Parking assistant dent.◀

The concept Transporting cargo Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of the vehicle is not taken into account by the system during the parking procedure. Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐ vene; otherwise, there is the risk of an acci‐ dent.◀

Curbs The parking assistant may steer the vehi‐ This system assists the driver in parking paral‐ cle over or onto curb if need be. lel to the road. Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐ Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces vene; otherwise, the wheels, tires, or the vehi‐ on both sides of the vehicle. cle may become damaged.◀ The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐ An engine that has been switched off by the sible parking line and takes control of steering Auto Start Stop function is restarted automati‐ during the parking procedure. cally when the parking assistant is activated. When parking, also take note of the visual and acoustic information and instructions issued Requirements by the PDC, the parking assistant and the rear‐ view camera and react accordingly. For measuring parking spaces A component of the parking assistant is the ▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 151. prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.

159 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 160

Controls Driving comfort

▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐ Ultrasound sensors cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.

Suitable parking space ▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. ▷ Min. length of gap between two objects: your vehicle's length plus approx. 4 ft/1.2 m. ▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking Regarding the parking procedure spaces are located on the side of the vehicle. ▷ Doors and trunk lid closed. To ensure full functionality: ▷ Parking brake released. ▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. ▷ When parking in parking spaces on the ▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not driver's side, the corresponding turn signal spray the sensors for long periods and must be set where applicable. maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm. ▷ Do not put stickers over sensors. Overview

Button in the vehicle Switching on/off

Switching on with the button Press button. The LED lights up.

The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display. Parking assistant is activated automatically.

Switching on with the reverse gear Parking assistant Shift into reverse. The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display. To activate: "Parking Assistant"

Switch off The system can be deactivated as follows: ▷ Press button.

▷ Switch off the ignition.

160 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 161

Driving comfort Controls

Display on the Control Display Parking using the parking assistant Check the traffic situation as well System activated/deactivated Louds noises outside and inside the ve‐ Symbol Meaning hicle can drown out the parking assistant's and PDC's signals. Gray: the system is not available. Check the traffic situation around the vehicle White: the system is available but with your own eyes; otherwise, there is a dan‐ not activated. ger of an accident.◀ The system is activated. 1. Switch on the parking assistant and acti‐ vate it if needed. System status The status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display. 2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ play. The best possible parking position will come after gear change on the stationary vehicle - wait for the automatic steering wheel move. The end of the parking procedure is indi‐ cated on the Control Display. ▷ Colored symbols, see arrows, on the side 3. Adjust the parking position yourself if of the vehicle illustrated. Parking assistant needed. is activated and search for parking space active. Interrupting manually ▷ Control Display shows suitable parking The parking assistant can be interrupted at any spaces at the edge of the road next to the time: vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant ▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐ on the Control Display. lighted. ▷ Press button. ▷ The parking procedure is ac‐ tive. Steering control has been taken over by system. Interrupting automatically The system is interrupted automatically in the following situations: ▷ Parking space search is always active whenever the vehicle is moving forward ▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if slow and straight, even if the system is de‐ he takes over steering. activated. When the system is deactivated, ▷ If a gear is selected that does not match the displays on the Control Display are the instruction on the Control Display. shown in gray. ▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. 6 mph/10 km/h.

161 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 162

Controls Driving comfort

▷ Possible on snow-covered or slippery road ▷ For small children and animals. surfaces. ▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g. ▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to coats. overcome, such as curbs. ▷ With external interference of the ultra‐ ▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly sound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud arise. machines. ▷ If the Park Distance Control PDC displays ▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐ clearances that are too small. aged or out of position. ▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts ▷ Under certain weather conditions such as or the time taken for parking is exceeded. high relative humidity, rain, snowfall, ex‐ ▷ If a turn signal has been actuated contrary treme heat or strong wind. to the desired side for parking. ▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other ▷ When switching to another function on the vehicles. Control Display. ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. A Check Control message is displayed. ▷ With moving objects. ▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as Resume ledges or cargo. An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐ ▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges. tinued if needed. ▷ With objects with a fine surface structure Follow the instructions on the Control Display such as fences. to do this. ▷ For objects with porous surfaces. System limits Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before No parking assistance or after a continuous tone sounds. The parking assistant does not offer assis‐ The parking assistant may identify parking tance in the following situations: spaces that are not suitable for parking. ▷ In tight curves. Malfunction Functional limitations A Check Control message is displayed. The system may not be fully functional in the The parking assistant failed. Have the system following situations: checked. ▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel roads. ▷ On slippery ground. ▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades. ▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the parking space.

Limits of ultrasonic measurement Ultrasonic measuring might not function under the following circumstances:

162 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 163

Climate control Controls

Climate control

Automatic climate control

1 Air distribution, left 11 Air distribution, right 2 Temperature, left 12 Seat heating, right 58 3 AUTO program, left 13 Active seat ventilation, right 58 4 Air flow, AUTO intensity, left, residual heat 14 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐ 5 Remove ice and condensation lated-air mode 6 Maximum cooling 15 Cooling function 7 Display 16 Rear window defroster 8 Air flow, AUTO intensity, right 17 SYNC program 9 AUTO program, right 18 Active seat ventilation, left 58 10 Temperature, right 19 Seat heating, left 58

163 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 164

Controls Climate control

Hints AUTO program Sufficient ventilation Press button. When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐ Air flow, air distribution and tempera‐ tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐ ture are controlled automatically. nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐ culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in Depending on the selected temperature, the interior continuously deteriorates and win‐ AUTO intensity program and outside influen‐ dow condensation increases.◀ ces, the air is directed to the windshield, side windows, upper body, and into the footwell. Climate control functions in detail The cooling function, refer to page 165, is switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐ Manual air distribution gram. At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐ Press button repeatedly to select a trols the program so as to prevent window program: condensation as much as possible. ▷ Upper body region. Intensity of the AUTO program ▷ Upper body region and footwell. With the AUTO program activated, the auto‐ ▷ Footwell. matic intensity control can be changed. ▷ Windows and footwell. Press the left or right side of the but‐ ▷ Windows, upper body region, and footwell. ton: decrease or increase the inten‐ ▷ Windows: driver's side only. sity. ▷ Windows and upper body region. The selected intensity is shown on the display If the windows are fogged over, press the of the automatic climate control. AUTO button on the driver's side to utilize the condensation sensor. Convertible program Temperature When the convertible top is open, the convertible program is activated as well. In the Turn the ring to set the desired convertible program, the automatic climate temperature. control is optimized for driving with the convertible top open. In addition, the air flow is increased as the vehicle speed increases. The efficiency of the convertible program can The automatic climate control achieves this be greatly enhanced by installing the wind de‐ temperature as quickly as possible, if needed flector. by using the maximum cooling or heating li‐ dacity, and then keeps it constant. Air flow, manual Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐ To manually adjust air flow turn off AUTO pro‐ perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐ gram first. mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐ just the set temperature. Press the left or right side of the but‐ ton: decrease or increase air flow.

164 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 165

Climate control Controls

The selected air flow is shown on the display of ▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously. the automatic climate control. ▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air The air flow of the automatic climate control control: a sensor detects pollutants in the may be reduced automatically to save battery outside air and shuts off automatically. power. ▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐ Defrosts windows and removes manently blocked. condensation If the windows are fogged over, switch off the Press button. recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO Ice and condensation are quickly re‐ button on the driver's side to utilize the con‐ moved from the windshield and the front side densation sensor. Make sure that air can flow windows. to the windshield. For this purpose, point the side vents onto the Sufficient ventilation side windows as needed. When remaining in the vehicle for an ex‐ tended period of time, ensure sufficient exter‐ Adjust air flow with the program active. nal ventilation. Do not continuously use recir‐ If the windows are fogged over, you can also culated-air mode; otherwise the air quality in switch on the cooling function or press the the interior continuously deteriorates and win‐ AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐ dow condensation increases.◀ sor. Cooling function Maximum cooling The car's interior can only be cooled with the Press button. engine running. The system is set to the lowest tem‐ Press button. perature, optimum air flow and air circulation mode. The air will be cooled and dehumidi‐ fied and, depending on the temperature set‐ Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐ ting, warmed again. gion. The vents need to be open for this. Depending on the weather, the windshield and The function is available above an external side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐ temperature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the gine is started. engine running is indicated. The cooling function is switched on automati‐ Adjust air flow with the program active. cally with the AUTO program. Automatic recirculated-air control/ When using the automatic climate control, recirculated-air mode condensation water, refer to page 182, devel‐ ops that exits underneath the vehicle. You may respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐ tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐ Rear window defroster rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air currently Press button. within the vehicle. The rear window defroster switches Press button repeatedly to select an off automatically after a certain period of time. operating mode:

165 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 166

Controls Climate control

The rear window defroster is only active when Switching the system on/off the rear window is closed. Switch off SYNC program ▷ Complete system: Press button. Press and hold the left button on the driver's side until the control Current settings on the driver's side clicks off. for the temperature, air flow, air distribution, and AUTO program are transferred to the front ▷ On the front passenger side: passenger side. Press and hold the left button on The program is switched off if the settings on the front passenger side. the front passenger side are changed. Switching on Press any button except: Residual heat ▷ Rear window defroster. The heat stored in the engine is used to heat the interior. ▷ Left side of Air volume button. ▷ Seat heating. Functional requirement ▷ Seat ventilation. ▷ Up to 15 minutes after switching off the ▷ If necessary, SYNC program. engine. ▷ Warm engine. Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter ▷ The battery is sufficiently charged. The microfilter removes dust and pollen from ▷ External temperature below 77 ℉/25 ℃. the incoming air. The availability of the function is shown on the The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous display of the automatic climate control. pollutants from the outside air that enters the vehicle. Switching on This combined filter should be replaced during 1. Switch off the ignition. scheduled maintenance, refer to page 220, of your vehicle. 2. Press the right side of the button on the driver's side. The symbol appears on the automatic cli‐ mate Control Display. The interior temperature, air volume and air distribution can be adjusted with the ignition switched on.

Switch off At the lowest fan speed, press the left side of the button on the driver's side. The symbol on the display of the automatic climate control flashes.

166 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 167

Climate control Controls

Ventilation matically routed to the windshield, to the side windows, and into the footwell. Front ventilation The systems can be switched on and off di‐ rectly or by using two preset reel-on times. They remain switched on for 30 minutes. Operation takes place on the iDrive or the re‐ mote control.

Hints Parked-car heating in enclosed areas Do not operate the parked-car heating in enclosed areas, since breathing in harmful ex‐ ▷ Thumbwheel to vary the temperature, ar‐ haust fumes may lead to loss of consciousness row 1. and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon Toward blue: colder. monoxide, an odorless and colorless but highly Toward red: warmer. toxic gas. Switch off the parked-car heating when refueling.◀ The set interior temperature for the driver and passenger are not changed. Operation of the parked-car heating ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, When parked-car heating is in operation, arrow 2. high temperatures can occur under the car ▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the body. Before the parked-car heating is vents continuously, arrows 3. switched on, make sure that no flammable ma‐ terials, such as hay, leaves, grass, etc. are un‐ der the vehicle. Such contact could lead to a Adjusting the ventilation fire, resulting in an increased risk of serious ▷ Ventilation for cooling: personal injury as well as property damage.◀ Direct vent in your direction when vehicle's At external temperatures below 32 ℉/0 ℃, wa‐ interior is too hot. ter vapor occurs that emerges from below the ▷ Draft-free ventilation: vehicle. Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you. Functional requirements

Parked-car ventilation/ Parked-car ventilation heating ▷ With the remote control or using the preset reel-on time: external temperature above The concept approx. 59 ℉/15 ℃. The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi‐ ▷ When operated directly and if there is no cle interior and lowers its temperature, if parked-car heating: any external tempera‐ needed. ture. The parked-car heating warms the vehicle in‐ Open the vents to allow air to flow out. terior, making snow and ice easier to remove. With the ignition switched off, the air is auto‐

167 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 168

Controls Climate control

Parked-car heating The symbol on the automatic climate con‐ ▷ With the remote control or using the preset trol flashes when the system has been reel-on time: external temperature below switched on. approx. 59 ℉/15 ℃. The system will only be switched on within the ▷ Direct operation: any external temperature. next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐ vated. ▷ The battery is sufficiently charged. ▷ The fuel tank is filled to above the reserve Remote control range. If the parked-car heating has not been used for Overview several months, it may be necessary to reel the system on again after several minutes.

Switching on/off directly On the Control Display:

1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Activate comfort heating" or "Activate comf. ventilation" 1 LED: transmission confirmation The symbol on the automatic climate con‐ 2 Switching on/off trol flashes if the system is switched on. 3 Activate parked-car ventilation/heating The system continues to run for some time af‐ 4 Deactivate parked-car ventilation/heating ter being switched off.

Preselecting the reel-on time Remote control range On the Control Display: The reception-dependent average range is ap‐ prox. 490 ft/150 m. 1. "Settings" The range is best when the remote control is 2. "Climate" held upright and as high as possible. 3. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:" 4. Set the desired time. Switching on/off directly

Activating the reel-on time 1. Press button until the green LED lights up. On the Control Display: 2. Within approx. the next 5 seconds, press 1. "Settings" the desired button until the green or red 2. "Climate" LED lights up: 3. "Activate timer 1" or "Activate timer 2" Switching on The symbol on the automatic climate con‐ trol lights up when the reel-on time is acti‐ Switch off vated.

168 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 169

Climate control Controls

Correct transmission to the system is con‐ New remote control firmed for approx. 2 seconds by rapid flashing A new remote control can be placed into oper‐ of the green LED. ation as a second remote control or if the origi‐ If there is a transmission error, the red LED nal one was lost; it can be initialized by your lights up for approx. 2 seconds. service center if needed. The symbol on the display of the automatic Two remote control devices can be used with climate control flashes. the vehicle.

Frequencies The remote control may not function properly if it experiences local interference from other systems or devices that use the same fre‐ quency.

Replacing the batteries Replace the battery if a Check Control mes‐ sage is displayed or if the LED either no longer lights up or flashes when the remote control is activated. No rechargeable batteries Do not use rechargeable batteries, since damage may result from the substances in the batteries.◀

1. Use a suitable object to unclip the battery compartment, arrow 1.

2. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐ ment, arrow 2. 3. Insert batteries of the same type. 4. Press the cover closed. Take the used battery to a recycling center or to your service center.

169 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 170

Controls Interior equipment

Interior equipment

Vehicle features and options Compatibility This chapter describes all standard, country- If this symbol is printed on the packag‐ specific and optional features offered with the ing or in the instructions of the system series. It also describes features that are not to be controlled, the system is gener‐ necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to ally compatible with the universal garage door the selected options or country versions. This opener. also applies to safety-related functions and If you have any questions, please contact: systems. The respectively applicable country ▷ Your service center. provisions must be observed when using the ▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet. respective features and systems. HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation. Universal Integrated Remote Control Control elements on the interior rearview mirror The concept The universal garage door opener can operate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled sys‐ tems such as garage door drives or lighting systems. The universal garage door opener re‐ places up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To operate the remote control, the buttons on the interior rearview mirror must be program‐ med with the desired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the particular system is required ▷ LED, arrow 1. in order to program the remote control. ▷ Buttons, arrow 2. During programming ▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐ During programming and before activat‐ quired for programming. ing a device using the universal garage door opener, ensure that there are no people, ani‐ mals or objects in the area of the remote-con‐ Programming trolled device; otherwise, there is a risk of in‐ jury or damage. General information Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- 1. Switch on the ignition. held transmitter.◀ 2. Initial setup: Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored Press and hold the left and right button on functions for the sake of security. the interior rearview mirror simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds until the LED on the interior rearview mirror flashes. This

170 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 171

Interior equipment Controls

erases all programming of the buttons on rearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and then the interior rearview mirror. stays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the system 3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐ features an alternating-code system. Flashing tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to and continuous illumination of the LED will re‐ 8 cm away from the buttons of the interior peat for approximately 20 seconds. rearview mirror. The required distance de‐ For systems with an alternating-code system, pends on the manual transmitter. the universal garage door opener and the sys‐ 4. Simultaneously press and hold the button tem also have to be synchronized. of the desired function on the hand-held Please read the operating manual to find out transmitter and the button to be program‐ how to synchronize the system. med on the interior rearview mirror. The Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐ LED on the interior rearview mirror will be‐ ond person. gin flashing slowly. To synchronize: 5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing 1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐ faster indicates that the button on the inte‐ mote-controlled system. rior rearview mirror has been programmed. 2. Program the relevant button on the interior If the LED does not flash faster after at rearview mirror as described. least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐ 3. Locate and press the synchronizing button tween the interior rearview mirror and the on the system being programmed. You hand-held transmitter and repeat the step. have approx. 30 seconds for the next step. Several more attempts at different distan‐ 4. Hold down the programmed button on the ces may be necessary. Wait at least interior rearview mirror for approximately 15 seconds between attempts. 3 seconds and then release it. If necessary, Canada: if programming with the hand- repeat this step up to three times in order held transmitter was interrupted, hold to finish synchronization. Once synchroni‐ down the interior rearview mirror button zation is complete, the programmed func‐ and repeatedly press and release the tion will be carried out. hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐ onds. Reprogramming individual buttons 6. To program other functions on other but‐ 1. Switch on the ignition. tons, repeat steps 3 to 5. 2. Press and hold the interior rearview mirror The systems can be controlled using the inte‐ button to be programmed. rior rearview mirror buttons. 3. As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held Special feature of the alternating- transmitter for the system to be controlled code wireless system approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the If you are unable to operate the system after buttons of the interior rearview mirror. The repeated programming, please check if the required distance depends on the manual system to be controlled features an alternat‐ transmitter. ing-code system. Read the system's operating manual, or press the programmed button on the interior rear‐ view mirror longer. If the LED on the interior

171 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 172

Controls Interior equipment

4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes desired function on the hand-held trans‐ rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The mitter. functions cannot be deleted individually. 5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐ rior rearview mirror LED flashes more rap‐ idly. The LED flashing faster indicates that Sun visor the button on the interior rearview mirror has been programmed. The system can Glare shield then be controlled by the button on the in‐ Fold the sun visor down or up. terior rearview mirror. If the LED does not flash faster after at Vanity mirror least 60 seconds, change the distance and A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐ repeat the step. Several more attempts at hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the different distances may be necessary. Wait mirror lighting switches on. at least 15 seconds between attempts. Canada: if programming with the hand- held transmitter was interrupted, hold Ashtray/cigarette lighter down the interior rearview mirror button and repeatedly press and release the Steptronic transmission: open hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐ onds.

Controls Before operation Before operating a system using the uni‐ versal garage door opener, ensure that there are no people, animals, or objects within the range of movement of the remote-controlled system; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or Press button. damage. Also follow the safety instructions of the hand- Emptying held transmitter.◀ Take out the insert. The system, such as the garage door, can be operated using the button on the interior rear‐ Lighter view mirror while the engine is running or when Push in the lighter. the ignition is started. To do this, hold down the button within receiving range of the system The lighter can be removed as until the function is activated. The interior rear‐ soon as it pops back out. view mirror LED stays lit while the wireless sig‐ nal is being transmitted. Danger of burns Deleting stored functions Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth‐ Press and hold the left and right button on the erwise, there is a danger of getting burned. interior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐

172 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 173

Interior equipment Controls

Switch off the ignition and take the remote Steptronic transmission: center control with you when leaving the vehicle so console that children cannot use the lighter and burn themselves.◀

Replace the cover after use Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀

Connecting electrical Press button. devices Remove the cover or cigarette lighter. Hints In the front passenger footwell Do not connect charging devices to the 12 volt socket in the vehicle Do not connect battery chargers to the fac‐ tory-installed 12 volt sockets in the vehicle as this may damage the vehicle battery due to an increased power consumption.◀

Replace the cover after use Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀ Socket is located below the glove compart‐ ment. Sockets To access the socket: fold open the cover.

General information Center armrest The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment while the engine is run‐ ning or when the ignition is switched on.

Note The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts. Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable connectors. Remove the cover.

173 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 174

Controls Interior equipment

Ski bag 4. Load the ski bag. If necessary, wrap the sharp edges of the skis. Capacity 5. Tighten the retaining strap. The ski bag makes it possible to transport two pairs of skis up to a length of 6 ft/2.10 m.

Preparing and loading the ski bag 1. Pull the release in the direction of the ar‐ row, and remove the insert from the front. If necessary, when pulling the release, press against the insert.

Securing the ski bag Secure the ski bag by tightening the re‐ taining strap; otherwise, the contents could present a source of danger to the passengers, for example during braking or evasive maneu‐ vers.◀

Stowing the ski bag 2. Lay out the ski bag. Proceed in the reverse order of loading. 3. Press button in the cargo area, open tail‐ When replacing the insert, place both pins into board and attach to the rear wall via mag‐ the rail at the bottom and press the insert back netic holder. in place until a 'click' is heard. Ensure that the rear seat backrest upholstery is not damaged.

174 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 175

Storage compartments Controls

Storage compartments

Vehicle features and options Glove compartment This chapter describes all standard, country- Note specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not Close the glove compartment again im‐ necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to mediately the selected options or country versions. This Close the glove compartment immediately af‐ also applies to safety-related functions and ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐ systems. The respectively applicable country cur during accidents.◀ provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Opening

Hints No loose objects in the car's interior Do not stow any objects in the car's inte‐ rior without securing them; otherwise, they may present a danger to occupants e.g., during braking and evasive maneuvers.◀

Do not place anti-slip mats on the dash‐ Pull the handle. board The light in the glove compartment switches Do not place anti-slip mats on the dashboard. on. The mat materials could damage the dash‐ board.◀ Closing Fold cover closed. Storage compartments USB interface for data transfer The following storage compartments are avail‐ able in the vehicle interior: The concept ▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger Connection for importing and exporting data side, refer to page 175. on USB devices, e.g.: ▷ Storage compartment in the center arm‐ ▷ Personal Profile settings, refer to page 35. rest, refer to page 176. ▷ Music collection, see user's manual for ▷ Compartments in the doors. Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐ ▷ Pockets on the backrests of the front cation. seats. ▷ Net in the front passenger footwell. Hints Observe the following when connecting:

175 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 176

Controls Storage compartments

▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐ Locking the storage compartment nector into the USB interface. ▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or lights to the USB interface. ▷ Do not connect USB hard drives. ▷ Do not use the USB interface for recharg‐ ing external devices.

With navigation system Professional or TV: at a glance The storage compartment in the armrest can be locked with an integrated key to separately secure the trunk lid, refer to page 41, e.g.

After the storage compartment is locked, the remote control can be handed out without the integrated key, refer to page 34, for instance at a hotel. This prevents access to the storage compart‐ ment and to the cargo area. The USB interface is located in the center arm‐ rest. Connection for an external audio device An external audio device, e.g., Front center armrest an MP3 player, can be con‐ nected via the AUX-IN port or Opening the USB audio interface in the A storage compartment is located in the center center armrest. armrest between the front seats.

Clothes hooks Do not obstruct view When suspending clothing from the hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driv‐ er's view.◀

No heavy objects Do not hang heavy objects from the Press buttons next to the lock. hooks; otherwise, they may present a danger to passengers during braking and evasive ma‐ neuvers.◀ The clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐ dles in the rear.

176 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 177

Storage compartments Controls

Cupholders Storage under the cargo floor panel

Hints Shatter-proof containers and no hot drinks Use light and shatter-proof containers and do not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the increased danger of injury in an accident.◀

Unsuitable containers Do not forcefully push unsuitable con‐ Raise the cargo floor panel using the strap. tainers into the cupholders. This may result in damage.◀

Steptronic transmission: center console

To open: press on the cover.

Storage compartments in the cargo area

Net Small objects can be stowed in the net on the rear cargo area trim.

Lashing eyes To secure the cargo, refer to page 184, there are lashing eyes in the cargo area.

177 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Driving tips

This chapter provides you with information useful in dealing with specific driving and operating modes.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 180

Driving tips Things to remember when driving

Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and options they achieve their full traction potential after a break-in time. This chapter describes all standard, country- Drive conservatively for the first specific and optional features offered with the 200 miles/300 km. series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to Brake system the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐ systems. The respectively applicable country prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimal per‐ provisions must be observed when using the formance between brake discs and brake respective features and systems. pads. Drive moderately during this break-in pe‐ riod.

Breaking-in period Following part replacement The same break-in procedures should be ob‐ General information served if any of the components above-men‐ Moving parts need time to adjust to one an‐ tioned have to be renewed in the course of the other (break-in time). vehicle's operating life. The following instructions will help accomplish a long vehicle life and good efficiency. General driving notes During break-in, do not use the Launch Con‐ trol, refer to page 81. Closing the trunk lid

Engine, transmission, and axle drive Drive with the trunk lid closed Only drive with the tailgate closed; other‐ Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km wise, in the event of an accident or braking and Do not exceed the maximum engine and road evasive maneuvers, passengers and other traf‐ speed: fic may be injured, and the vehicle may be damaged. In addition, exhaust fumes may en‐ ▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and ter the vehicle interior.◀ 100 mph/160 km/h. Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐ If driving with the tailgate open cannot be stances. avoided: ▷ If the convertible top is closed, close all From 1,200 miles/2,000 km windows. The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be ▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents. increased. ▷ Drive moderately.

Tires Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐ ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;

180 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 181

Things to remember when driving Driving tips

Hot exhaust system mission will be conducted away from the vehi‐ cle interior.◀ Hot exhaust system High temperatures are generated in the Hydroplaning exhaust system. Do not remove the heat shields installed and Hydroplaning never apply undercoating to them. Make sure When driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐ that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves, duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀ grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hot On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can exhaust system while driving, while in idle po‐ form between the tires and road surface. sition mode, or when parked. Such contact could lead to a fire, resulting in an increased This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐ risk of serious personal injury as well as prop‐ ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete erty damage. loss of contact between the tires and the road surface, ultimately undermining your ability to Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, steer and brake the vehicle. there is a danger of getting burned.◀ Driving through water Climate control windshield Observe water level and speed Do not exceed the maximum water level and maximum speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the trans‐ mission may be damaged.◀ Drive though calm water only and only if it is not deeper than 9.8 inches/25 cm and at this height, no faster than walking speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h. The marked area is not covered with heat re‐ flective coating. Braking safely Use this area for garage door openers, devices Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐ for electronic toll collection, etc. ard feature. Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations needed. Mobile communication devices in the vehicle Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐ Mobile communication devices in the ve‐ fort. hicle Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from It is not recommended to use mobile phones, the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its such as mobile phones, in the vehicle interior active mode. without a direct connection to an external aer‐ ial. Otherwise, the vehicle's electronics and In certain braking situations, the perforated mobile communication devices can interfere brake discs can cause functional problems. with each other. In addition, there is no assur‐ However, this has no effect on the perform‐ ance that the radiation generated during trans‐ ance and operational reliability of the brake.

181 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 182

Driving tips Things to remember when driving

Objects within the range of movement wise the brakes may overheat and reduce of the pedals brake efficiency. No objects in the area around the pedals You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, going all the way to first gear, Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other if needed. objects out of the pedal area; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be impeded while Brake disc corrosion driving and create the risk of an accident. Brake disc corrosion and contamination of the Do not place additional floor mats over existing brake pads are favored by: mats or other objects. ▷ Low mileage. Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly attached to ▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not floor. used at all. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐ ▷ Infrequent use of the brakes. tened again after they were removed for clean‐ Corrosion will built up when the maximum ing, e.g.◀ pressure applied to the brake pads during braking is not reached - thus discs don't get Driving in wet conditions cleaned. When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause press brake pedal ever so gently every few a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐ miles. sponse - generally that cannot be corrected. Ensure that this action does not endanger Condensation under the parked other traffic. vehicle The heat generated in this process helps dry When using the automatic climate control, the brake discs and pads. condensation water develops collecting under‐ In this way braking efficiency will be available neath the vehicle. when you need it. These traces of water under the vehicle are normal. Hills Avoid stressing the brakes Avoid placing excessive stress on the brake system. Light but consistent brake pres‐ sure can lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out and possibly even brake failure.◀

Do not drive in neutral Do not drive in neutral or with the engine stopped, as doing so disables engine braking. In addition, steering and brake assist are un‐ available with the engine stopped.◀ Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear that requires least braking efforts. Other‐

182 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 183

Loading Driving tips

Vehicle features and options vehicle and unstable driving situations may result. This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

2. Determine the combined weight of the Hints driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. Overloading the vehicle 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver To avoid exceeding the approved ca‐ and passengers from XXX kilograms or pacity of the tires, never overload the vehicle. YYY pounds. Overloading can lead to overheating and in‐ creases the rate at which damage develops in‐ 4. The resulting figure equals the available side the tires. This could result in a sudden amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐ loss of tire inflation pressure.◀ pacity. For example, if the YYY amount equals No fluids in the cargo area 1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs Make sure that fluids do not leak into the passengers in your vehicle, the amount of cargo area; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐ available cargo and luggage load capacity aged.◀ is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs = 400 lbs. Heavy and hard objects 5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐ Do not stow any heavy and hard objects gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐ in the car's interior without securing them; oth‐ cle. That weight may not safely exceed the erwise, they may present a danger to occu‐ available cargo and luggage load capacity pants, e.g., during braking and evasive maneu‐ calculated in Step 4. vers.◀

Determining the load limit

1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐ hicle’s placard: ▷ The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the

183 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 184

Driving tips Loading

Load Securing cargo Securing cargo Stow and secure the cargo as described; otherwise it may present a danger to the occu‐ pants, e.g., during braking and evasive maneu‐ vers.◀ ▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐ taining straps or with a cargo net or draw straps. ▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with The maximum load is the sum of the weight of cargo straps. the occupants and the cargo. Cargo straps, cargo netting, retaining straps or The greater the weight of the occupants, the draw straps on the lashing eyes in the trunk. less cargo that can be transported.

Stowing cargo ▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo. ▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐ ble, directly behind and at the bottom of the rear passenger seat backrests. ▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle.

Securing cargo

Lashing eyes in the trunk

To secure the cargo there are four lashing eyes in the cargo area.

184 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 185

Saving fuel Driving tips

Saving fuel

Vehicle features and options Tires This chapter describes all standard, country- General information specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not Tires can affect fuel consumption in various necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to ways, e.g., tire size may influence fuel con‐ the selected options or country versions. This sumption. also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country Check the tire inflation pressure provisions must be observed when using the regularly respective features and systems. Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation pressure at least twice a month and before starting on a long trip. General information Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐ sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and Your vehicle contains advanced technology for tire wear. the reduction of fuel consumption and emis‐ sions. Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ Drive away immediately ferent factors. Carrying out certain measures, such as a mod‐ Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while erate driving style and regular maintenance, the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving can influence fuel consumption and the envi‐ right away, but at moderate engine speeds. ronmental impact. This is the quickest way of warming the cold engine up to operating temperature. Remove unnecessary cargo Look well ahead when Additional weight increases fuel consumption. driving Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. Remove attached parts By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐ following use cle driving ahead of you. Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐ Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel dynamics and increase the fuel consumption. consumption.

Closing the windows Avoid high engine speeds Open windows increase air resistance and As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers therefore lead to greater fuel consumption. fuel consumption and reduces wear. Use 1st gear to get the vehicle moving. Start‐ ing with the 2nd gear, accelerate rapidly. When

185 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 186

Driving tips Saving fuel

accelerating, shift up before reaching high en‐ Switch off any functions that gine speeds. are not currently needed When you reach the desired speed, shift into the highest applicable gear and drive with the Functions such as seat heating and the rear engine speed as low as possible and at a con‐ window defroster require a lot of energy and stant speed. reduce the range, especially in city and stop- and-go traffic. If necessary, observe the gear shift indicator of the vehicle, refer to page 94. Reel off these functions if they are not needed. The ECO PRO driving program supports the energy conserving use of comfort features. Use coasting These functions are automatically deactivated partially or completely. When approaching a red light, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt. Have maintenance carried For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐ out erator and let the vehicle roll. The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting. Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle efficiency and operating life. The maintenance should be carried out by Switch off the engine during your service center. longer stops Also note the BMW Maintenance System, refer to page 220. Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g., at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic congestion. ECO PRO

Auto Start/Stop function The concept The Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves automatically switches off the engine during a on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐ stop. gine control and comfort features, e. g. the cli‐ If the engine is switched off and then restarted mate control output, are adjusted. rather than leaving the engine running con‐ Under certain conditions the engine is auto‐ stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are matically decoupled from the transmission in reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐ the D selector lever position. The vehicle con‐ onds of switching off the engine. tinues traveling with the engine idling to re‐ In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐ duce fuel consumption. Selector lever position mined by other factors, such as driving style, D remains engaged. road conditions, maintenance or environmental In addition, context-sensitive instructions are factors. displayed to assist with an optimized fuel con‐ sumption driving style. The achieved extended range is displayed in the instrument cluster as bonus range.

186 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 187

Saving fuel Driving tips

Overview This function is only available in ECO PRO The system includes the following mode. EfficientDynamics functions and displays: ECO PRO climate control ▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 187. "ECO PRO climate control" ▷ ECO PRO tips driving instruction, refer to page 188 Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient. ▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to By making a slight change to the set tempera‐ page 187. ture, or slowly adjusting the rate of heating or cooling of the car's interior, fuel consumption ▷ ECO PRO coasting driving status, refer to can be economized. page 189. The mirror heating is made available when out‐ Activate ECO PRO side temperatures are very cold. Press button repeatedly until ECO ECO PRO potential PRO is displayed in the instrument Shows potential savings with the current set‐ cluster. tings in percentages.

Configuring ECO PRO Display in the instrument cluster

Via the Driving Dynamics Control Display in the instrument display 1. Activate ECO PRO. When ECO PRO mode is activated, the display 2. "Configure ECO PRO" switches to a special configuration. 3. Configure the program. Some of the displays may differ from the dis‐ play in the instrument cluster. Via the iDrive Blue bar segments symbolize the gained bo‐ 1. "Settings" nus range in stages. 2. "Driving mode" In addition, the bonus range is highlighted in blue in the total range display. 3. "Configure ECO PRO" Configure the program. ECO PRO bonus range ECO PRO Tip An adjusted driving style helps you extend your driving range. ▷ "Tip at:": This may be displayed as the Adjust the ECO PRO speed. bonus range in the instrument ▷ "ECO PRO speed warning": cluster. The output is reduced once the set ECO The bonus range is shown in the range display. PRO speed is reached. The bonus range is automatically reset every time the vehicle is refueled. Coasting Fuel-efficiency can be optimized by disengag‐ ing the engine and Coasting, refer to page 189, with the engine idling.

187 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 188

Driving tips Saving fuel

Efficiency display efficient by backing off the accelerator for in‐ stance. Display in the instrument cluster

Note The efficiency display and ECO PRO tips in the instrument cluster appear when the ECO PRO display is activated. Activating driving style and ECO PRO tips: 1. "Settings" 2. "Instrument cluster" 3. "ECO PRO Info" Display in the instrument display In the instrument display:

1. "Settings" 2. "Instrument cluster" 3. "Driving mode view"

ECO PRO tip, symbols An additional symbol and text instructions are displayed. Symbol Measure

A mark in the efficiency display informs about For efficient driving back off the ac‐ the current driving style. celerator or delay accelerating to al‐ Mark in the area of arrow 1: display of the en‐ low time to assess road conditions. ergy recovered by coasting or when braking. Reduce speed to the selected ECO Mark in the area of arrow 2: display when ac‐ PRO speed. celerating. Your driving style's efficiency is shown by the Steptronic transmission: shift from bar's color: M/S to D. ▷ Blue display: efficient driving style as long as the mark moves within the blue range. Indications on the Control Display ▷ Gray display: adjust driving style, e. g. by backing off the accelerator pedal. EfficientDynamics The display switches to blue as soon as all Information on fuel consumption and technol‐ conditions for fuel-efficiency-optimized driving ogy can be displayed while driving. are met. 1. "Vehicle info" ECO PRO tip, driving tip 2. "EfficientDynamics" The arrow indicates that the driving style can be adjusted to be more fuel

188 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 189

Saving fuel Driving tips

Displaying fuel consumption history This driving condition is referred to as coast‐ The average fuel consumption can be dis‐ ing. played within an adjustable time frame. As soon as you step on the brake or accelera‐ Vertical bars show consumption for the se‐ tor pedal, the engine is automatically coupled lected time frame. again. Trip interruptions are represented below the Hints bar on the time axis. Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO, re‐ "Consumption history" fer to page 186, driving mode. Adjusting fuel consumption history Coasting is automatically activated when ECO time frame PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics Control. Select the symbol. The function is available in a certain speed Resetting fuel consumption history range. 1. Open "Options". A proactively driving style helps the driver to use the function as often as possible and sup‐ 2. "Reset consumption history" ports the fuel-conserving effect of coasting. Displaying EfficientDynamics info Safety mode The current efficiency can be displayed. The function is not available under one of the "EfficientDynamics info" following conditions. The following systems are displayed: ▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated. ▷ Auto Start/Stop function. ▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on ▷ Energy recovery. steep uphill or downhill grades. ▷ Climate control output. ▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low ▷ Coasting. or vehicle electrical system drawing exces‐ sive current. Display ECO PRO tips ▷ Cruise control activated. "ECO PRO Tips" Functional requirements Settings are stored for the profile currently in use. In ECO PRO mode, this function is available in a speed range from approximately 30 mph, ap‐ Coasting prox. 50 km/h to 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h, if the following conditions are met: The concept ▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not The system helps to conserve fuel. operated. To do this, under certain conditions the engine ▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐ is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐ tion D. sion when selector lever position D is set. The ▷ Engine and transmission are at operating vehicle continues traveling with the engine temperature. idling to reduce fuel consumption. Selector The driving status Coast can be influenced lever position D remains engaged. with the shift paddles.

189 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 190

Driving tips Saving fuel

Display Deactivating the system manually The function can be deactivated in the Config‐ Display in the instrument cluster ure ECO PRO, refer to page 187, menu, e.g., to The mark in the efficiency dis‐ use the braking effect of the engine when trav‐ play below the tachometer is eling downhill. backlit in blue and is located at Settings are stored for the profile currently in the zero point. The tachometer use. approximately indicates idle speed. The coasting point indicator is illuminated at the zero point during coasting.

Display in the instrument display The mark in the efficiency dis‐ play is backlit in blue and is lo‐ cated at the zero point. The coasting point indicator is il‐ luminated at the zero point dur‐ ing coasting.

Indications on the Control Display The Coasting driving condition is displayed in EfficientDynamics Info while this driving mode is active.

Color code blue, arrow 1, and symbol, arrow 2: driving condition Coasting.

Displaying EfficientDynamics info 1. "Vehicle info" 2. "EfficientDynamics" 3. "EfficientDynamics info"

190 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 191

Saving fuel Driving tips

191 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Mobility

In order to always ensure your mobility, you will find important information on operating fluids, wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside Assistance in the following.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 194

Mobility Refueling

Refueling

Vehicle features and options 2. Turn the tank lid counterclockwise. This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. 3. Place the tank lid in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap. Hints Observe the fuel recommendation, refer to page 196, prior to refueling. Refuel promptly Refuel no later than at a range of 30 miles/50 km or engine operation might fail and damage might occur.◀

Fuel lid Closing 1. Fit the lid and turn it clockwise until you Opening clearly hear a click. 1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler 2. Close the fuel filler flap. flap. Do not pinch the retaining strap Do not pinch the retaining strap attached to the lid; otherwise, the lid cannot be closed properly and fuel vapors can escape.◀

Manually unlocking fuel filler flap In the event of an electrical malfunction, e.g. The release is located in the trunk.

194 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 195

Refueling Mobility

1. Open the cover on the right side trim.

2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump symbol. This releases the fuel filler flap.

Observe the following when refueling The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time. Do not overfill the fuel tank Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise fuel may eslide, causing harm to the environ‐ ment and damaging the vehicle.◀

Handling fuels Observe safety regulations posted at the gas station.◀

195 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 196

Mobility Fuel

Fuel

Vehicle features and options Ethanol should satisfy the following quality standards: This chapter describes all standard, country- US: ASTM 4806–xx specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to xx: comply with the current standard in each the selected options or country versions. This case. also applies to safety-related functions and Do not use a fuel with a higher percent‐ systems. The respectively applicable country age of ethanol provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems. Do not use a fuel with a higher ethanol per‐ centage than recommended or one with other types of alcohol, e.g. M5 to M100; otherwise Fuel recommendation this could damage the engine and fuel supply system.◀ Note Recommended fuel grade General fuel quality BMW recommends AKI 91. Even fuels that conform to the specifica‐ tions can be of low quality. This may cause en‐ Minimum fuel grade gine problems, for instance poor engine startup behavior, poor handling and/or poor BMW recommends AKI 89. performance. Switch gas stations or use a Minimum fuel grade brand name fuel with a higher octane rating.◀ Do not use any gasoline below the mini‐ mum fuel grade as this may impair engine per‐ Gasoline formance.◀ For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐ should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur con‐ ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds tent. when starting at high outside temperatures. Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐ This has no effect on the engine life. taining metal must not be used. Fuel quality Refuel only with unleaded gasoline with‐ The use of poor-quality fuels may result out metallic additives. in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐ Do not refuel with any leaded gasoline or gaso‐ tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐ line with metallic additives, e. g. manganese or ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐ iron, as this can cause permanent damage to ronmental conditions such as high ambient the catalytic converter and other compo‐ temperature and high altitude, may occur. nents.◀ If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐ Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of ommend switching to a high quality gasoline 10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling. brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐ ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐

196 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 197

Fuel Mobility

gine deposits, it is highly recommended to purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers. Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in the need for unscheduled main‐ tenance.◀

197 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 198

Mobility Wheels and tires

Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and options Only check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. This means after driving no more This chapter describes all standard, country- than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has specific and optional features offered with the been parked for at least 2 hours. series. It also describes features that are not The displays of inflation devices may under- necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to read by up to 1.45 psi/0.1 bar. the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and For Flat Tire Monitor: after correcting the tire systems. The respectively applicable country inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire provisions must be observed when using the Monitor. respective features and systems. For Tire Pressure Monitor: after correcting the tire inflation pressure, reset the Tire Pressure Monitor. Tire inflation pressure Tire inflation pressure specifications Safety information The tire inflation pressure table, refer to The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐ page 199, contains all tire inflation pressure sure influence the following: specifications for the specified tire sizes at the ▷ The service life of the tires. ambient temperature. Tire inflation pressure specifications apply to approved tire sizes and ▷ Road safety. recommended tire brands. This information ▷ Driving comfort. can be obtained from your service center. To identify the correct tire inflation pressure, Checking the tire inflation pressure please note the following: Check the tire inflation pressure regularly ▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle. Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐ ▷ Maximum permitted driving speed. sure, and correct it as needed: at least twice a month and before a long trip. If you fail to ob‐ Tire inflation pressures up to serve this precaution, you may be driving on 100 mph/160 km/h tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for that may not only compromise your vehicle's optimum driving comfort, note the pressure driving stability, but also lead to tire damage values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer and the risk of an accident.◀ to page 199, and adjust as necessary. Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire in‐ flation pressure. Tires heat up while driving, and the tire infla‐ tion pressure increases along with the tire's temperature. The tire inflation pressure speci‐ fications relate to cold tires or tires with the ambient temperature.

198 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 199

Wheels and tires Mobility

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Front: 245/35 R 20 2.6 / 38 - 95 Y XL RSC - 2.9 /42 Rear: 275/30 R 20 97 Y XL RSC

Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h These pressure values can also be found on T 135/90 R 17 104 the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's M 4.2 / 60 door pillar. 640i xDrive Maximum permissible speed Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other‐ Tire size Pressure specifica‐ wise, tire damage and accidents may result.◀ tions in bar/PSI

Specifications in Tire inflation pressure values up to bar/PSI with cold 100 mph/160 km/h tires

640i 245/45 R 18 100 V 2.4 / 35 2.7 / 39 Tire size Pressure specifications M+S XL A/S RSC in bar/PSI 245/40 R 19 98 V M Specifications in +S XL A/S RSC bar/PSI with cold 245/45 R 18 100 V tires M+S XL RSC

Front: 245/45 R 18 2.4 / 35 - 245/45 R 18 100 V 2.3 / 33 2.6 / 38 96 Y RSC - 2.4 / 35 M+S XL A/S RSC Rear: 275/40 R 18 245/40 R 19 98 V 99 Y RSC M+S XL A/S RSC Front: 245/40 R 19 2.4 / 35 - 245/45 R 18 100 V 94 Y RSC - 2.6 / 38 M+S XL RSC Rear: 275/35 R 19 Front: 245/45 R 18 2.3 / 33 - 96 Y RSC 96 Y RSC - 2.4 / 35 Rear: 275/40 R 18 99 Y RSC

Front: 245/40 R 19 2.4 / 35 - 94 Y RSC - 2.6 / 38 Rear: 275/35 R 19 96 Y RSC

199 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 200

Mobility Wheels and tires

Tire size Pressure specifica‐ 650i xDrive tions in bar/PSI Tire size Pressure specifications Front: 245/35 R 20 2.8 / 41 - in bar/PSI 95 Y XL RSC - 3.0 / 44 Specifications in Rear: 275/30 R 20 bar/PSI with cold 97 Y XL RSC tires Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of T 135/90 R 17 104 50 mph / 80 km/h 245/45 R 18 100 V 2.4 / 35 2.7 / 39 M 4.2 / 60 M+S XL A/S RSC 245/40 R 19 98 V 650i M+S XL A/S RSC 245/45 R 18 100 V Tire size Pressure specifications M+S XL RSC in bar/PSI Front: 245/45 R 18 2.4 / 35 - Specifications in 96 Y RSC bar/PSI with cold - 2.4 / 35 tires Rear: 275/40 R 18 99 Y RSC

Front: 245/40 R 19 2.4 / 35 - 245/45 R 18 100 V 2.3 / 33 2.6 / 38 94 Y RSC M+S XL A/S RSC - 2.6 / 38 Rear: 275/35 R 19 245/40 R 19 98 V 96 Y RSC M+S XL A/S RSC 245/45 R 18 100 V Front: 245/35 R 20 2.8 / 41 - M+S XL RSC 95 Y XL RSC - 3.0 / 44 Rear: 275/30 R 20 Front: 245/45 R 18 2.3 / 33 - 97 Y XL RSC 96 Y RSC - 2.4 / 35 Rear: 275/40 R 18 99 Y RSC Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h Front: 245/40 R 19 2.4 / 35 - Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h 94 Y RSC - 2.6 / 38 In order to drive at maximum speeds in Rear: 275/35 R 19 excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, 96 Y RSC and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for Front: 245/35 R 20 2.6 / 38 - speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the 95 Y XL RSC - 2.9 /42 relevant table on the following pages. Other‐ Rear: 275/30 R 20 wise tire damage and accidents could occur.◀ 97 Y XL RSC

200 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 201

Wheels and tires Mobility

Tire inflation pressure values over Tire size Pressure specifications 100 mph/160 km/h in bar/PSI

640i Specifications in bar/PSI with cold Without high-speed tuning feature tires Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI 245/45 R 18 100 2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46 Specifications in V M+S XL RSC bar/PSI with cold tires Front: 2.5 / 36 - 245/45 R 18 96 Y - 2.7 / 39 RSC 245/45 R 18 100 V 2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41 Rear: 275/40 R 18 M+S XL A/S RSC 99 Y RSC 245/40 R 19 98 V M+S XL A/S RSC Front: 2.6 / 38 - 245/40 R 19 94 Y - 3.0 / 44 245/40 R 18 100 V RSC M+S XL RSC Rear: 275/35 R 19 Front: 245/45 R 18 2.3 / 33 - 96 Y RSC 96 Y RSC - 2.4 / 35 Front: 2.8 / 41 - Rear: 275/40 R 18 245/35 R 20 95 Y - 3.3 / 48 99 Y RSC XL RSC Front: 245/40 R 19 2.4 / 35 - Rear: 275/30 R 20 94 Y RSC - 2.6 / 38 97 Y XL RSC Rear: 275/35 R 19 Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of 96 Y RSC T 135/90 R 17 50 mph / 80 km/h Front: 245/35 R 20 2.6 / 38 - 104 M 4.2 / 60 95 Y XL RSC - 2.9 /42 Rear: 275/30 R 20 640i xDrive 97 Y XL RSC Without high-speed tuning feature Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of T 135/90 R 17 104 50 mph / 80 km/h M 4.2 / 60

With high-speed tuning feature

201 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 202

Mobility Wheels and tires

Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI in bar/PSI

Specifications in Specifications in bar/PSI with cold bar/PSI with cold tires tires

245/45 R 18 100 V 2.7 / 39 3.0 / 44 245/45 R 18 100 V 2.8 / 41 3.2 / 46 M+S XL A/S RSC M+S XL A/S RSC 245/40 R 19 98 V 245/45 R 18 100 V M+S XL A/S RSC M+S XL RSC

245/45 R 18 100 V 245/40 R 19 98 V 3.0 / 44 3.4 / 49 M+S XL RSC M+S XL A/S RSC

Front: 245/45 R 18 2.4 / 35 - Front: 245/45 R 18 2.4 / 35 - 96 Y RSC - 2.4 / 35 96 Y RSC - 2.6 / 38 Rear: 275/40 R 18 Rear: 275/40 R 18 99 Y RSC 99 Y RSC

Front: 245/40 R 19 2.4 / 35 - Front: 245/40 R 19 2.6 / 38 - 94 Y RSC - 2.6 / 38 94 Y RSC - 2.8 / 41 Rear: 275/35 R 19 Rear: 275/35 R 19 96 Y RSC 96 Y RSC

Front: 245/35 R 20 2.8 / 41 - Front: 245/35 R 20 3.0 / 44 - 95 Y XL RSC - 3.0 / 44 95 Y XL RSC - 3.2 / 46 Rear: 275/30 R 20 Rear: 275/30 R 20 97 Y XL RSC 97 Y XL RSC

Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h T 135/90 R 17 104 T 135/90 R 17 104 50 mph / 80 km/h M 4.2 / 60 M 4.2 / 60

With high-speed tuning feature 650i Without high-speed tuning feature

202 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 203

Wheels and tires Mobility

Tire size Pressure specifications Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI in bar/PSI

Specifications in Front: 245/40 R 19 2.6 / 38 - bar/PSI with cold 94 Y RSC - 3.0 / 44 tires Rear: 275/35 R 19 96 Y RSC

245/45 R 18 100 V 2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41 Front: 245/35 R 20 2.9 /42 - M+S XL A/S RSC 95 Y XL RSC - 3.3 / 48 245/45 R 18 100 V Rear: 275/30 R 20 M+S XL RSC 97 Y XL RSC

245/40 R 19 98 V 2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44 M+S XL A/S RSC 650i xDrive Without high-speed tuning feature Front: 245/45 R 18 2.3 / 33 - 96 Y RSC - 2.4 / 35 Tire size Pressure specifications Rear: 275/40 R 18 in bar/PSI 99 Y RSC Specifications in Front: 245/40 R 19 2.4 / 35 - bar/PSI with cold tires 94 Y RSC - 2.6 / 38 Rear: 275/35 R 19 96 Y RSC 245/45 R 18 100 V 2.7 / 39 3.0 / 44 Front: 245/35 R 20 2.6 / 38 - M+S XL A/S RSC 95 Y XL RSC - 2.9 /42 245/40 R 19 98 V Rear: 275/30 R 20 M+S XL A/S RSC 97 Y XL RSC 245/45 R 18 100 V M+S XL RSC

With high-speed tuning feature Front: 245/45 R 18 2.4 / 35 - Tire size Pressure specifications 96 Y RSC - 2.4 / 35 in bar/PSI Rear: 275/40 R 18 99 Y RSC Specifications in bar/PSI with cold Front: 245/40 R 19 2.4 / 35 - tires 94 Y RSC - 2.6 / 38 Rear: 275/35 R 19 96 Y RSC 245/45 R 18 100 V 2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46 M+S XL RSC Front: 245/35 R 20 2.8 / 41 - 95 Y XL RSC Front: 245/45 R 18 2.5 / 36 - - 3.0 / 44 Rear: 275/30 R 20 96 Y RSC - 2.7 / 39 97 Y XL RSC Rear: 275/40 R 18 99 Y RSC

203 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 204

Mobility Wheels and tires

With high-speed tuning feature Speed letter Tire size Pressure specifications Q = up to 100 mph, 160 km/h in bar/PSI R = up to 106 mph, 170 km/h

Specifications in S = up to 112 mph, 180 km/h bar/PSI with cold T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h tires H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h 245/45 R 18 100 V 2.8 / 41 3.2 / 46 W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h M+S XL A/S RSC Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h 245/45 R 18 100 V M+S XL RSC Tire Identification Number

245/40 R 19 98 V 3.0 / 44 3.4 / 49 DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0115 M+S XL A/S RSC xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand xxx: tire size and tire design Front: 245/45 R 18 2.4 / 35 - 0115: tire age 96 Y RSC - 2.6 / 38 Rear: 275/40 R 18 Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of 99 Y RSC the U.S. Department of Transportation.

Front: 245/40 R 19 2.6 / 38 - Tire age 94 Y RSC - 2.8 / 41 DOT … 0115: the tire was manufactured in the Rear: 275/35 R 19 1st week of 2015. 96 Y RSC

Front: 245/35 R 20 3.0 / 44 - Recommendation 95 Y XL RSC - 3.2 / 46 Regardless of wear and tear, replace tires at Rear: 275/30 R 20 least every 6 years. 97 Y XL RSC Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder Tire identification marks and maximum section width. Tire size For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature A 245/45 R 18 96 Y 245: nominal width in mm DOT Quality Grades 45: aspect ratio in % Treadwear R: radial tire code Traction AA A B C 18: rim diameter in inches Temperature A B C 96: load rating, not for ZR tires All passenger car tires must conform to Fed‐ Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires eral Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

204 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 205

Wheels and tires Mobility

Treadwear Temperature grade for this tire The treadwear grade is a comparative rating The temperature grade for this tire is es‐ based on the wear rate of the tire when tested tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐ ernment test course. For example, a tire tion, or excessive loading, either separately or graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, in combination, can cause heat buildup and times as well on the government course as a possible tire failure. tire graded 100. The relative performance of If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀ tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart signifi‐ RSC – Run-flat tires cantly from the norm due to variations in driv‐ ing habits, service practices and differences in Run-flat tires, refer to page 208, are labeled road characteristics and climate. with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the sidewall. Traction M+S The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Winter and all-season tires with better cold weather performance than summer tires. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire Tire tread marked C may have poor traction performance. Summer tires The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than and does not include acceleration, cornering, 0.12 in/3 mm. hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if the tire tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm. Temperature The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, Winter tires and C, representing the tire's resistance to the Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than generation of heat and its ability to dissipate 0.16 in/4 mm. heat when tested under controlled conditions Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. less suitable for winter operation. Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐ terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐ quired by law.

205 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 206

Mobility Wheels and tires

Minimum tread depth In case of tire damage If there are indications of tire damage, re‐ duce your speed immediately and have the rims and tires checked right away; otherwise, there is the increased risk of an accident. Drive carefully to the nearest service center. If necessary, have the vehicle towed or trans‐ ported there. Otherwise, tire damage can be‐ come life threatening for vehicle occupants and also other traffic.◀ Wear indicators are distributed around the Repair of tire damage tire's circumference and have the legally re‐ quired minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm. For safety reasons, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you do not have They are marked on the side of the tire with damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐ TWI, Tread Wear Indicator. placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐ sult.◀ Tire damage Changing wheels and tires General information Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign Mounting objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear. Information on mounting tires Hints Have mounting and balancing performed only by a service center. Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles If work is not carried out properly, there is a can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and danger of subsequent damage and related suspension parts. This is more likely to occur safety hazards.◀ with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐ ioning between the wheel and the road. Be Wheel and tire combination careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your You can ask the service center about the right speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped wheel/tire combination and wheel rim versions with low-profile tires. for the vehicle. Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐ Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair fects: the function of a variety of systems such as ▷ Unusual vibrations while driving. ABS or DSC. ▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐ To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐ dency to pull to the left or right. sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐ Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over figuration from a single manufacturer. curbs, road damage, or similar things. Following tire damage, have the original wheel and tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible.

206 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 207

Wheels and tires Mobility

Approved wheels and tires Retreaded tires You should only use wheels and tires Possibly substantial variations in the de‐ that have been approved by the vehicle manu‐ sign and age of the tire casing structures can facturer for your vehicle type; otherwise, e.g., limit service life and have a negative impact on despite having the same official size ratings, road safety.◀ variations can lead to chassis contact and with it, the risk of severe accidents Winter tires The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot eval‐ Winter tires are recommended for operating on uate non-approved wheels and tires to deter‐ winter roads. mine if they are suited for use, and therefore Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro‐ cannot guarantee the operating safety of the vide better winter traction than summer tires, vehicle.◀ they do not provide the same level of perform‐ ance as winter tires. Recommended tire brands Maximum speed of winter tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then a respective symbol is displayed in your field of vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire specialist or from your service center. Maximum speed for winter tires Do not exceed the maximum speed for the respective winter tires; otherwise, tire dam‐ For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐ age and accidents can occur.◀ hicle recommends certain tire brands. These can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall. Run-flat tires With proper use, these tires meet the highest standards for safety and handling. If you are already using run-flat tires, for your own safety you should replace them only with the same kind. No spare tire is available in the New tires case of a flat tire. Your service center will be Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐ glad to advise you. ing circumstances when tires are brand-new; they achieve their full traction potential after a Rotating wheels between axles break-in time. Different wear patterns can occur on the front Drive conservatively for the first and rear axles depending on individual driving 200 miles/300 km. conditions. The tires can be rotated between the axles to achieve even wear. Your service Retreaded tires center will be glad to advise you. After rotating, The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐ check the tire pressure and correct if needed. ommend the use of retreaded tires. Rotating the tires is not permissible on vehi‐ cles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the front and rear axles.

207 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 208

Mobility Wheels and tires

Storage into the tires, which seals the damage from the Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with inside. as little exposure to light as possible. The compressor can be used to check the tire Always protect tires against all contact with oil, inflation pressure. grease and fuels. Hints Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐ sure indicated on the side wall of the tire. ▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐ lity System found on the compressor and sealant container. Run-flat tires ▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐ tive if the tire puncture measures approx. Label 1/8 in/4 mm or more. ▷ Contact the nearest service center if the tire cannot be made drivable. ▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies that have penetrated the tire. ▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant container and apply it to the steering wheel. ▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM wheel electronics. In this case, have the RSC label on the tire sidewall. electronics checked at the next opportu‐ The wheels consist of tires that are self-sup‐ nity and have them replaced if needed. porting, to a limited degree, and possibly spe‐ Enclosed areas cial rims. Do not let the engine run in enclosed The support of the sidewall allows the tire to areas, since breathing in exhaust fumes may remain drivable to a restricted degree in the lead to loss of consciousness and death. The event of a tire inflation pressure loss. exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas.◀ Follow the instructions for continued driving with a flat tire. Storage Changing run-flat tires The Mobility System is located under the For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No cargo floor panel. spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your service center will be glad to advise you.

Mobility System

The concept With the Mobility System, minor tire damage can be sealed quickly to enable continued travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped

208 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 209

Wheels and tires Mobility

Sealing container Filling the tire with sealant 1. Shake the sealing container.

▷ Sealing container, arrow 1.

▷ Filling hose, arrow 2. 2. Pull the connection hose fully out of the Observe use-by date on the sealant container. compressor housing. Do not kink the hose.

Compressor

3. Screw the connection hose onto the con‐ nector of the sealant container. 1 Holder for bottle 2 Compressor 3 Connector/cable for socket 4 Connection hose 5 On/off reel 6 Inflation pressure dial 7 Reduce inflation pressure

209 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 210

Mobility Wheels and tires

4. Insert the sealant container on the com‐ 7. With the ignition turned on or the engine pressor housing in an upright position. running, reel on the compressor.

5. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con‐ Switch off the compressor after 10 mi‐ tainer onto the tire valve of the defective nutes wheel. Do not allow the compressor to run longer than 10 minutes; otherwise, the device will overheat and may be damaged.◀ Let the compressor run for approx. 3 to 8 mi‐ nutes to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar. While the tire is being filled with sealant, the tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach approx. 5 bar. Do not reel off the compressor at this point. 6. With the compressor switched off, insert If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar is not the plug into the power socket inside the reached: vehicle. 1. Switch off the compressor. 2. Unscrew the filling hose from the wheel. 3. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐ tribute the sealant in the tire. 4. Inflate the tire again using the compressor. If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot be reached, contact your service center.

Stowing the Mobility System 1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant con‐ tainer from the wheel. 2. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐ pressor from the sealant container. 3. Connect the filling hose of the sealant con‐ tainer previously connected to the tire valve with the available connector on the sealant container.

210 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 211

Wheels and tires Mobility

This prevents leftover sealant from escap‐ Snow chains ing from the container. 4. Wrap the empty sealant container in suita‐ Fine-link snow chains ble material to avoid dirtying the cargo Only certain types of fine-link snow chains area. have been tested by the manufacturer of the 5. Stow the Mobility System back in the vehi‐ vehicle, classified as road-safe and approved. cle. Information about the approved snow chains are available from the service center. Distributing the sealant Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to en‐ Use sure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped tire. with the tires of the following size: Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. ▷ 225/55 R 17. If possible, do not drive at speeds less than ▷ 245/45 R 18. 12 mph/20 km/h. ▷ 245/40 R 19. To correct the tire inflation pressure Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐ tions. 1. Stop at a suitable location. Make sure that the snow chains are always 2. Screw the connection hose of the com‐ sufficiently tight. Retighten as needed accord‐ pressor directly onto the tire valve stem. ing to the chain manufacturer's instructions. 3. Insert the connector into the power socket Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after inside the vehicle. mounting snow chains, as doing so may result 4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to in incorrect readings. 2.5 bar. Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after ▷ Increase pressure: with the ignition mounting snow chains, as doing so may result turned on or the engine running, reel in incorrect readings. on the compressor. When driving with snow chains, briefly activate ▷ To reduce the pressure: press the but‐ Dynamic Traction Control if needed. ton on the compressor. Maximum speed with snow chains Continuing the trip Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h Do not exceed the maximum permissible when using snow chains. speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. Snow chain detection Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor. The concept Replace the defective tire and the sealant con‐ tainer of the Mobility System as soon as possi‐ When using snow chains, settings should be ble. made via the iDrive for the snow chains being applied. The snow chain detection system supports you by automatically showing the detected state on the Control Display.

211 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 212

Mobility Wheels and tires

When snow chains are in use, the rear axle steering of the Integral Active Steering is deac‐ tivated automatically. At speeds above the maximum permitted speed with snow chains of 30 mph/50 km/h, the rear axle steering is activated again auto‐ matically.

Activating the status 1. "Settings" 2. "Tire chains" 3. "Tire chains installed"

Automatic detection If functioning properly: ▷ Snow chains are mounted. Settings are not activated . After you drive a short distance, a Check Control message is shown and the state is activated automatically. Confirm the automatic activation. ▷ Snow chains are not mounted. Settings are activated . At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, a Check Control message is displayed. Deactivate the status manually. If not functioning properly: ▷ Snow chains are mounted. Settings are not activated . A Check Control message is not displayed. The automatic detection system is mal‐ functioning. Activate the status manually.

Activating/deactivating rear axle steering If the status indicating that snow chains are in use is activated, the rear axle steering is deac‐ tivated automatically. At speeds above 30 mph/50 km/h, the rear axle steering is activated again, even though snow chains are in use.

212 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 213

Engine compartment Mobility

Engine compartment

Important features in the engine compartment

1 Vehicle identification number 4 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal 2 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal 5 Oil filler neck 3 Washer fluid reservoir 6 Coolant reservoir, except 650i.

Hood If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐ lines, have any work on the vehicle performed Opening the hood only by a service center. If work is not carried out properly, there is a Working in the engine compartment danger of subsequent damage and related Never attempt to perform any service or safety hazards.◀ repair operations on your vehicle without the necessary professional technical training.

213 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 214

Mobility Engine compartment

Never reach into the engine compart‐ Closing the hood ment Hood open when driving Never reach into spaces or gaps in the engine If you see any signs that the hood is not compartment; otherwise, there is a risk of in‐ completely closed while driving, pull over im‐ jury, e.g., from rotating or hot parts.◀ mediately and close it securely.◀ Danger of injury when the hood is open Danger of jamming There is a danger of injury from protrud‐ Make sure that the closing path of the ing parts when the hood is open.◀ hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ 1. Pull the lever.

Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16 2. Press the release handle and open the in/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully. hood. The hood must audibly engage on both sides.

3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood.

214 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 215

Engine oil Mobility

Engine oil

Vehicle features and options If the engine oil level reaches the minimum level, a check control message is displayed. This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the Requirements series. It also describes features that are not A current measured value is available after ap‐ necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter the selected options or country versions. This trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip also applies to safety-related functions and is displayed. systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the With frequent short-distance trips, regularly respective features and systems. perform a detailed measurement.

Displaying the engine oil level General information On the Control Display: The engine oil consumption is dependent on 1. "Vehicle info" the driving style and driving conditions. 2. "Vehicle status" The engine oil consumption can increase in 3. "Engine oil level" case of, for example: ▷ Sporty driving. Engine oil level display messages ▷ Break-in the engine. Different messages appear on the display de‐ ▷ Idling of the engine. pending on the engine oil level. Pay attention to these messages. ▷ Usage of non-approved engine oil grades. If the engine oil level is too low, within the next Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level 125 miles/200 km Add engine oil, refer to after refueling. page 216. The vehicle is equipped with electronic oil Engine oil level too low measurement. Add engine oil immediately; otherwise, The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐ an insufficient amount of engine oil could re‐ uring principles: sult in engine damage.◀ ▷ Status display Take care not to add too much engine oil. ▷ Detailed measurement Too much engine oil Have the vehicle checked immediately; Electronic oil measurement otherwise, surplus engine oil can lead to en‐ gine damage.◀ Status display

The concept The engine oil level is monitored electronically while driving and shown on the Control Dis‐ play.

215 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 216

Mobility Engine oil

Detailed measurement Oil filler neck

The concept In the detailed measurement the engine oil level is checked and displayed via a scale. Gasoline engine: If the engine oil level reaches the minimum level, a check control message is displayed. Diesel engine: During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐ Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐ creased somewhat. played in the instrument cluster. The quantity to be added is indicated in the message dis‐ General information played in the instrument cluster. A detailed measurement is only possible with certain engines. Adding engine oil Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km; Requirements otherwise, this may cause engine damage.◀ ▷ Vehicle is on level road. Do not add too much engine oil ▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in selector lever position N or P and accelera‐ When too much engine oil is added, im‐ tor pedal not depressed. mediately have the vehicle checked, otherwise, this may cause engine damage.◀ ▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐ perature. Protect children Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐ Performing a detailed measurement dren and observe the warnings on the contain‐ In order to perform a detailed measurement of ers to prevent health risks.◀ the engine oil level:

1. "Vehicle info" 2. "Vehicle status" Engine oil types to add 3. "Measure engine oil level" Hints 4. "Start measurement" No oil additives The engine oil level is checked and displayed via a scale. Oil additives may lead to engine dam‐ age.◀ Time: approx. 1 minute. Viscosity grades for engine oils When selecting an engine oil, ensure that Adding engine oil the engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40, General information and SAE 5W-30 or malfunctions or engine Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehi‐ damage may occur.◀ cle before engine oil is added.

216 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 217

Engine oil Mobility

The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine.

Suitable engine oil types You can add engine oils that meet the follow‐ ing oil rating standards: Gasoline engine

BMW Longlife-01.

BMW Longlife-01 FE.

Further information regarding the oil specifica‐ tions and viscosities of engine oils can be in‐ quired with the service center.

Alternative engine oil types If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐ gine oil with the following oil rating can be added: Gasoline engine

API SM or superior oil rating.

Engine oil change: The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you let the service center change the motor oil.

217 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 218

Mobility Coolant

Coolant

Vehicle features and options Checking 1. Let the engine cool. This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the 2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly series. It also describes features that are not counterclockwise to allow any excess necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to pressure to dissipate, then open it. the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

Hints Danger of burns from hot engine Do not open the cooling system while 3. Open the coolant reservoir lid. the engine is hot; otherwise, esliding coolant 4. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐ may cause burns.◀ tween the minimum and maximum marks in the filler neck. Suitable additives Only use suitable additives; otherwise, engine damage may occur. The additives are harmful to your health.◀ Coolant consists of water and additives. Not all commercially available additives are suitable for the vehicle. Information about the suitable additives are available from the service center.

Coolant level

General information If there is no Min. and Max. mark in the filler neck of the coolant reservoir, have the coolant level checked if needed by your service center and add coolant as needed. Depending on the engine installation, the cool‐ ant reservoir is located on the right side or the left side of the engine compartment.

218 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 219

Coolant Mobility

Adding 1. Let the engine cool. 2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pressure to dissipate, then open it.

3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill. 4. Turn the lid until there is an audible click. The arrows on the coolant reservoir and the lid must point towards one another. 5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐ nated as soon as possible.

Disposal Comply with the relevant environmen‐ tal protection regulations when dispos‐ ing of coolant and coolant additives.

219 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 220

Mobility Maintenance

Maintenance

Vehicle features and options Service data in the remote control Information on the required maintenance is This chapter describes all standard, country- continuously stored in the remote control. specific and optional features offered with the Your service center will read out this data and series. It also describes features that are not suggest the right array of service procedures necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to for your vehicle. the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐ systems. The respectively applicable country mote control with which the vehicle was driven provisions must be observed when using the most recently. respective features and systems. Storage periods Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐ BMW maintenance system tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐ count. The maintenance system indicates required maintenance measures, and thereby provides If this occurs, have a service center update the support in maintaining road safety and the op‐ time-dependent maintenance procedures, erational reliability of the vehicle. such as checking brake fluid and, if needed, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/ In some cases scopes and intervals may vary activated-charcoal filter. according to the country-specific version. Re‐ placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐ cants and wear materials are calculated sepa‐ Service and Warranty rately. Additional information is available from the service center. Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Condition Based Service Canadian models CBS Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐ Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐ formation Booklet for US models and Warranty count the driving conditions of your vehicle. and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐ Based on this, Condition Based Service recog‐ els for additional information on service re‐ nizes the maintenance requirements. quirements. The system makes it possible to adapt the Maintenance and repair should be performed amount of maintenance corresponding to your by your service center. Make sure to have reg‐ user profile. ular maintenance procedures recorded in the Detailed information on service requirements, vehicle's Service and Warranty Information refer to page 93, can be displayed on the Con‐ Booklet for US models, and in the Warranty trol Display. and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐ els. These entries are proof of regular mainte‐ nance.

220 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 221

Maintenance Mobility

Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis

Note Socket for Onboard Diagnosis The socket for onboard diagnostics may only be used by the service center or a work‐ shop that operates in accordance with the specifications of the vehicle manufacturer with correspondingly trained personnel and other authorized persons. Otherwise, use may result in operating problems for the vehicle.◀

Position

There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for checking the primary components in the vehi‐ cle's emissions.

Emissions ▷ The warning lamp lights up: Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. ▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain circumstances: This indicates that there is excessive mis‐ firing in the engine. Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐ riod can seriously damage emission con‐ trol components, in particular the catalytic converter.

221 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 222

Mobility Replacing components

Replacing components

Vehicle features and options Replacing the wiper blades 1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer This chapter describes all standard, country- to page 77, the wiper arms. specific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features that are not 2. Fold up the wipers. necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

Onboard vehicle tool kit 3. Position the wiper blade in a horizontal po‐ sition. 4. Remove the wiper blade toward one side.

The onboard vehicle tool kit is located under the cargo floor panel.

5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order Wiper blade replacement of removal until it locks in place. 6. Fold down the wipers. Hints Do not fold down the wipers without wiper blades Lamp and bulb replacement Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades have not been installed; this may damage the Hints windshield.◀ Lights and bulbs Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu‐ tion to vehicle safety. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you entrust corresponding procedures to

222 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 223

Replacing components Mobility

the service center if you are unfamiliar those or If the headlights do not dim despite driving if they have not been described here. with the light switched on, increasing humidity You can obtain a selection of replacement forms, e. g. water droplets in the light, have the bulbs at the service center. service center check this.

Danger of burns Headlight setting Only change bulbs when they are cool; The headlight adjustments can be affected by otherwise, there is a danger of getting changing lights and bulbs. Have the head‐ burned.◀ lights' settings checked and corrected by serv‐ ice after a replacement. Working on the lighting system When working on the lighting system, Front lights, bulb replacement you should always reel off the lights affected to prevent short circuits. LED headlights To avoid possible injury or equipment damage when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions Overview provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀

Do not touch the bulbs Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with your bare hands, as even minute amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.◀

1 Corner-illuminating lights Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) 2 Low beams/high beams Some items of equipment use light-emitting 3 Parking lamp, daytime running lights diodes installed behind a cover as a light source. 4 Turn signal These light-emitting diodes, which are related 5 Side marker lights to conventional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes. Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) Do not remove the covers With LED headlights, all front lights and side Do not remove the covers, and never indicators are designed with LED technology. stare into the unfiltered light for several hours; If an LED fails, switch on the front fog lights otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.◀ and continue the trip with great care. Comply with local regulations. Headlight glass Contact your service center in the event of a Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐ malfunction. ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When driving with the light switched on, the conden‐ sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐ light glass does not need to be changed.

223 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 224

Mobility Replacing components

LED front fog lights Lights in the trunk lid These front fog lights are made using LED technology. Contact your service center in the Access to the lights event of a malfunction.

Turn signal in exterior mirror The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction.

Tail lights, bulb replacement

At a glance If necessary, remove the fasteners using the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle tool kit and fold away the cover.

Inside brake lamp Follow general instructions, refer to page 222. 24-watt bulb, HP24W. 1. Squeeze the bulb holder and pull it out.

1 Turn signal/brake lamp 2 Reversing lamp 3 Inside brake lamp 4 Rear lamp 5 Outside brake lamp 6 Rear reflector

Turn signal, outer brake, tail, and 2. Pull off the connector. license plate lights 3. Replace the bulb. Follow general instructions, refer to page 222. 4. Mount the bulb holder and the cover of the These lights feature LED technology. trunk lid in reverse order. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction. Reversing lamp Follow general instructions, refer to page 222.

224 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 225

Replacing components Mobility

16-watt bulb, W16W. Vehicle battery 1. Unscrew the bulb holder counterclockwise. Maintenance The battery is maintenance-free. The added amount of acid is sufficient for the service life of the battery. Further information about the battery can be obtained from your service center.

Battery replacement Use approved vehicle batteries only 2. Pull out the bulb and replace it. Only use vehicle batteries that have been 3. Mount the bulb holder and the cover of the approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer; trunk lid in reverse order. otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and systems or functions may not be fully availa‐ ble.◀ Changing wheels After a battery replacement, have the battery registered on the vehicle by the service center Hints to ensure that all comfort features are fully When using run-flat tires or sealants, a tire available and that any Check Control mes‐ does not need to be changed immediately in sages of these comfort features are no longer the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire. displayed. Which is why no spare tire is available. The tools for changing wheels are available as Charging the battery accessories from your service center. General information Jacking points for the vehicle jack Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐ ciently charged to guarantee that the battery remains usable for its full service life. The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐ lowing cases: ▷ When making frequent short-distance drives. ▷ If the vehicle is not used for prolonged pe‐ riods, longer than a month.

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐ Hints cated at the positions shown. Do not connect charging devices to the 12 volt socket in the vehicle Do not connect battery chargers to the fac‐ tory-installed 12 volt sockets in the vehicle as

225 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 226

Mobility Replacing components

this may damage the vehicle battery due to an In the glove compartment increased power consumption.◀

Starting aid terminals In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the starting aid terminals, refer to page 229, in the engine compartment with the engine off.

Power failure After a temporary power loss, some equipment needs to be newly initialized or individual set‐ Push the handle to the side, arrow 1, and open tings updated, e. g.: the lid, arrow 2. ▷ Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory: store the positions again. In the trunk ▷ Time: update. ▷ Date: update.

Disposing of old batteries Have old batteries disposed of by your service center or bring them to a recy‐ cling center. Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport. Open the cover on the right side trim, arrow. Information on the fuse types and locations is found on a separate sheet. Fuses

Hints Replacing fuses Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and do not replace a defective fuse with a substi‐ tute of another color or amperage rating; this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re‐ sulting in a fire in the vehicle.◀ Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse types and locations are stored in the fuse box in the trunk.

226 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 227

Breakdown assistance Mobility

Breakdown assistance

Vehicle features and options Hints This chapter describes all standard, country- Emergency Request not guaranteed specific and optional features offered with the For technical reasons, the Emergency series. It also describes features that are not Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavor‐ necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to able conditions.◀ the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and Overview systems. The respectively applicable country provisions must be observed when using the respective features and systems.

Hazard warning flashers

SOS button in the roofliner

Requirements ▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has been activated. The button is located in the center console. ▷ The radio-ready state is switched on. ▷ The Assist system is functional.

Intelligent Emergency Initiating an Emergency Request Request 1. Press the cover briefly to open it. 2. Press the SOS button until the LED at the The concept button lights up green. In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐ ▷ The LED lights up green: an Emergency quest can be made through this system. Request was initiated. If a cancel prompt appears on the display, General information the Emergency Request can be aborted. Only press the SOS button in an emergency. If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until the voice connection has been estab‐ lished. ▷ The LED flashes green when a connection to the BMW Response Center has been established.

227 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 228

Mobility Breakdown assistance

When the emergency request is received First aid kit at the BMW Response Center, the BMW Response Center contacts you and takes Note further steps to help you. Some of the articles have a limited service life. Even if you are unable to respond, the Check the expiration dates of the contents BMW Response Center can take further regularly and replace any expired items steps to help you under certain circum‐ promptly. stances. For this, data are transmitted to the BMW Storage Response Center which serve to deter‐ The first aid kit is located in the insert in the mine the necessary rescue measures. E. g. rear seat backrest. the current position of the vehicle, if it can be established. 1. Pull the release in the direction of the ar‐ ▷ If the LED is flashing green, but the BMW row, and remove the insert from the front. If Response Center can no longer be heard necessary, when pulling the release, press via the speaker, you can nevertheless still against the insert. be heard at the BMW Response Center.

Initiating an Emergency Request automatically Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐ quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐ ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐ fication is not affected by pressing the SOS button. 2. Remove the first aid kit. Warning triangle

When replacing the insert, place both pins into the rail at the bottom and press the insert back The warning triangle is located under a cover in place until a 'click' is heard. Ensure that the on the left side of the trunk. rear seat backrest upholstery is not damaged. Press against the lower edge of the cover and remove the cover.

228 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 229

Breakdown assistance Mobility

Jump-starting

General information If the battery is discharged, the engine can be started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐ bles with fully insulated clamp handles.

Hints The so-called starting aid terminal in the en‐ Do not touch live parts gine compartment acts as the battery's posi‐ To avoid the risk of potentially fatal in‐ tive terminal. jury, always avoid all contact with electrical components while the engine is running.◀ To prevent personal injury or damage to both vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐ dure.

Preparation Bodywork contact between vehicles Make sure that there is no contact be‐ tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other‐ The body ground or a special nut acts as the wise, there is a danger of short circuits.◀ battery negative terminal. 1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐ hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This infor‐ Connecting the cables mation can be found on the battery. 1. Pull off the lid of the BMW starting aid ter‐ 2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐ minal. cle. 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive 3. Switch off any electronic systems/power jumper cable to the positive terminal of the consumers in both vehicles. battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐ Starting aid terminals tance. Connecting order 3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of the cable to the positive terminal of the Connect the jumper cables in the correct battery, or to the corresponding starting order to prevent risk of injury from arcing.◀ aid terminal of the vehicle to be started. 4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of assisting vehicle. 5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the

229 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 230

Mobility Breakdown assistance

corresponding engine or body ground of Tow truck the vehicle to be started.

Starting the engine Never use spray fluids to start the engine. 1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an in‐ creased idle speed. 2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be started in the usual way. If the first starting attempt is not success‐ Do not lift the vehicle ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐ Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or other attempt in order to allow the dis‐ body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage charged battery to recharge. may result.◀ 3. Let both engines run for several minutes. Use tow fitting located in the front only for po‐ 4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐ sitioning the vehicle. verse order. Check the battery and recharge if needed. Towing other vehicles

Hints Tow-starting and towing Light towing vehicle Note The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will Tow-starting and towing not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐ For tow-starting or towing, switch off the sponse.◀ Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise malfunc‐ tions of the individual braking systems might Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly lead to accidents.◀ Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may Steptronic transmission: transporting cause damage.◀ your vehicle ▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐ pending on local regulations. Note ▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed. identify the vehicle being towed by placing Therefore, contact a service center in the a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐ event of a breakdown. dow. Do not have the vehicle towed Tow bar Have your vehicle transported on a load‐ ing platform only; otherwise, damage may oc‐ The tow fittings used should be on the same cur.◀ side on both vehicles.

230 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 231

Breakdown assistance Mobility

Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting Screw thread for tow fitting the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe the following: ▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going around corners. ▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is secured with an offset.

Tow rope When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut. Push out the cover by pressing on the top To avoid jerking and the associated stresses edge. on the vehicle components when towing, al‐ ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps. Tow-starting

Tow fitting Steptronic transmission The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐ Do not tow-start the vehicle. ried in the vehicle. Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front the transmission. or rear of the BMW. Have the cause of the starting problems fixed.

The tow fitting is located in the onboard vehi‐ cle tool kit under the cargo floor panel.

Tow fitting, information on use ▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in. ▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads only. ▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g., do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the vehicle can occur.◀

231 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 232

Mobility Care

Care

Vehicle features and options outside of the vehicle for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.◀ This chapter describes all standard, country- specific and optional features offered with the Automatic car washes series. It also describes features that are not necessarily available in your car, e. g., due to Hints the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and Do not use high pressure washing sys‐ systems. The respectively applicable country tems provisions must be observed when using the With washing systems operating at high pres‐ respective features and systems. sures and nozzle positions close to the win‐ dows, drops of water can penetrate.◀ Car washes Note the following: ▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or General information those that use soft brushes in order to Regularly remove foreign objects such as avoid paint damage. leaves in the area below the windshield when ▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not the hood is raised. damaged by the transport mechanisms. Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in ▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐ may be damaged, depending on the width age the vehicle. of the vehicle. ▷ Deactivate the rain sensor, refer to Hints page 77, to avoid unintentional wiper acti‐ Steam jets or high-pressure washers vation. When using steam jets or high-pressure ▷ Do not treat the convertible top with wax. washers, hold them a sufficient distance away Ensure that a cycle without wax or a spe‐ and use a maximum temperature of cial cycle for convertibles is available. 140 ℉/60 ℃. ▷ In some cases, an unintentional alarm can Holding them too close or using excessively be triggered by the interior motion sensor high pressures or temperatures can cause of the alarm system. Follow the instruc‐ damage or preliminary damage that may then tions on avoiding an unintentional alarm, lead to long-term damage. refer to page 45. Follow the user's manual for the high-pressure Guide rails in car washes washer.◀ Avoid car washes with guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body Cleaning sensors/camera lenses with could be damaged.◀ high-pressure washers When using high-pressure washers, do not Before driving into a car wash spray the sensors and camera lenses on the In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a car wash, take the following steps:

232 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 233

Care Mobility

Steptronic transmission: After washing the vehicle 1. Drive into the car wash. After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action 2. Engage selector lever position N. can be reduced and corrosion of the brake 3. Deactivating Automatic Hold, refer to discs can occur. page 74. Completely remove all residues on the win‐ 4. Release the parking brake. dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to 5. Switch the engine off. smearing and to reduce wiper noises and In this way, the ignition remains switched wiper blade wear. on, and a Check-Control message is dis‐ played. Vehicle care Do not turn off the ignition in the car wash Car care products Do not turn off the ignition in the car wash; BMW recommends using care and cleaning otherwise, selector lever position P is en‐ products from BMW, since these have been gaged and damages can result.◀ tested and approved. The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside Car care and cleaning products when in selector lever position N. A signal Follow the instructions on the container. sounds when an attempt is made to lock the vehicle. When cleaning the interior, open the doors or windows. To start the engine with Steptronic transmis‐ sion: Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐ cles. 1. Depress the brake pedal. Cleansers can contain substances that are 2. Press the Start/Stop button. dangerous and harmful to your health.◀ Pressing the Start/Stop button without step‐ ping on the brake turns the ignition off. Vehicle paint Regular care contributes to driving safety and Selector lever position value retention. Environmental influences in Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐ areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐ cally: taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐ ▷ When the ignition is switched off. fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐ ▷ After approx. 15 minutes. quency and extent of your car care to these influences. Headlights Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil, ▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐ acidic cleansers. mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐ tered or discolored. ▷ Soak areas that have been dirtied e. g., from insects, with shampoo and wash off Only use respectively approved cleaning and with water. care products for vehicles with matte finish. Suitable care products for matte finishes are ▷ Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an available from the service center. ice scraper.

233 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 234

Mobility Care

Caring for the convertible top 2. Make the convertible top cleaner foam up The appearance and life of the convertible top using a well saturated sponge, moving it in depend on correct care and operation. circular motions. Note the following instructions: 3. Finish washing the vehicle in the car wash or rinse with ample amounts of water. ▷ To prevent water stains, mildew spots, and chafe marks, do not enclose the Otherwise, follow the instructions for use from convertible top in the convertible top well the manufacturer. for a long period and do not fold and stow Treat the convertible top with an impregnating the convertible top in the convertible top agent after it has been washed three to five well while the top is wet or frozen. times. ▷ Remove water stains that may neverthe‐ Suitable cleaners and car products can be ob‐ less have appeared on the roofliner using a tained from the service department. microfiber cloth and an interior cleaner. ▷ When the vehicle is parked in enclosed Leather care areas for lengthy periods, ensure that the Remove dust from the leather often, using a area is well ventilated. cloth or vacuum cleaner. ▷ If possible, park the vehicle in the shade to Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime protect it from intensive solar radiation so chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased that color, rubber and fabric are not af‐ wear and premature degradation of the leather fected. surface. ▷ Remove bird droppings immediately as To guard against discoloration, such as from their corrosive effect will otherwise attack clothing, provide leather care roughly every the convertible top and damage the rubber two months. seals. Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐ ▷ Hard to remove tree sap or bird droppings cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially can be removed from the convertible top more visible. with special tree sap remover and a soft Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and brush. grease will gradually break down the protective Do not use spot remover layer of the leather surface. Do not use spot remover, paint thinner, Suitable care products are available from the solvent, gasoline, or similar products to re‐ service center. move spots on the convertible top. These products may destroy the rubber coating. In‐ Upholstery material care correct care and cleaning may cause the Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner. convertible top and its seams to become If upholstery is very dirty, e.g., with beverage leaky.◀ stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth To remove heavy soiling, especially for light with a suitable interior cleaner. colored convertible tops, use a special Clean the upholstery down to the seams using convertible top cleaner. large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the Proceed as follows: material vigorously.

1. Spray the convertible top with the convertible top cleaner.

234 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 235

Care Mobility

Damage from Velcro® fasteners ▷ Matt black spray-coated components. Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or ▷ Painted parts in the interior. other articles of clothing can damage the seat Clean with a microfiber cloth. covers. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are Dampen cloth lightly with water. closed.◀ Do not soak the roofliner. Caring for special components No cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐ vents Light-alloy wheels Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam to surface damage.◀ jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐ turer's instructions. Safety belts Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and can destroy the protective layer of adjacent thus have a negative impact on safety. components, such as the brake disk. Chemical cleaning Chrome surfaces Do not clean chemically; this can destroy Carefully clean components such as the radia‐ the webbing.◀ tor grille or door handles with an ample supply Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐ belts clipped into their buckles. ularly when they have been exposed to road Do not allow the reels to retract the safety salt. belts until they are dry. Rubber components Carpets and floor mats Aside from water, treat only with rubber cleansers. No objects in the area around the pedals When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other silicon-containing car care products in order to objects out of the pedal area; otherwise, the avoid damage or noises. function of the pedals could be impeded while driving and create the risk of an accident. Fine wood parts Do not place additional floor mats over existing Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐ mats or other objects. nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a Only use floor mats that have been approved soft cloth. for the vehicle and can be properly attached to floor. Plastic components Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐ These include: tened again after they were removed for clean‐ ▷ Imitation leather surfaces. ing, e.g.◀ ▷ Roofliner. Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐ ▷ Lamp lenses. rior for cleaning. ▷ Instrument cluster cover.

235 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 236

Mobility Care

If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the direction of travel only.

Sensor/camera lenses To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass detergent.

Displays/monitors Cleaning displays and screens Do not use any chemical or household cleaning agents; otherwise, surfaces can be af‐ fected.◀

Keeping out moisture Keep all fluids and moisture away from the unit; otherwise, electrical components can be damaged.◀

Avoid pressure Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage can result.◀ Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.

Long-term When the vehicle is shut down for longer than three months, special measures must be taken. Additional information is available from the service center.

236 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 237

Care Mobility

237 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Reference

This chapter contains the technical data and an index that will quickly take you to the information you need.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 240

Reference Technical data

Technical data

Note The technical data and specifications in this found in the approval documents, on informa‐ Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. tion signs on the vehicle or can be obtained The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, from the service center. for example, due to the selected special equip‐ The information in the vehicle documents al‐ ment, country version or country-specific ways has priority. measurement method. Detailed values can be

Dimensions The dimensions can vary depending on the roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate, model version, equipment or country-specific for example, due to the selected special equip‐ measurement method. ment, tires, load and chassis version. The specified heights do not take into account attached parts, for example, a roof antenna,

BMW 6 Series Convertible

Width with mirrors inches/mm 82.3/2,090

Width without mirrors inches/mm 74.6/1,894

Height inches/mm 53.7/1,365

Length inches/mm 192.8/4,896

Wheelbase inches/mm 112.4/2,855

Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 38.4/11.7

240 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 241

Technical data Reference

Weights

640i

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,125/2,325

Load lbs/kg 680/308

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,415/1,095

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,845/1,290

Cargo area capacity cu ft/liters 10.6-12.4/300-350

640i xiDrive

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,270/2,390

Load lbs/kg 695/315

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,535/1,150

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,890/1,311

Cargo area capacity cu ft/liters 10.6-12.4/300-350

650i

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,345/2,424

Load lbs/kg 675/306

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,555/1,159

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,900/1,310

Cargo area capacity cu ft/liters 10.6-12.4/300-350

650i xDrive

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,465/2,479

Load lbs/kg 680/308

Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,670/1,211

Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,930/1,329

Cargo area capacity cu ft/liters 10.6-12.4/300-350

241 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 242

Reference Technical data

Capacities

US gal/liters Notes

Fuel tank, approx. 18.5/70 Fuel quality, refer to page 196

242 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 243

Technical data Reference

243 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 244

Reference Everything from A to Z

Everything from A to Z

Index A Air pressure, tires 198 Automatic deactivation, front- Alarm system 44 seat passenger airbags 109 ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐ Alarm, unintentional 45 Automatic headlight con‐ tem 134 All around the center con‐ trol 103 ACC, Active Cruise Control sole 16 Automatic Hold 73 with Stop & Go 142 All around the interior rear‐ Automatic locking 44 Acceleration Assistant, refer view mirror 17 Automatic recirculated-air to Launch Control 81 All around the steering control 165 Accessories and parts 7 wheel 14 Automatic Soft Closing, Activated-charcoal filter 166 All-season tires, refer to Win‐ doors 41 Active Blind Spot Detec‐ ter tires 207 Automatic transmission, see tion 130 All-wheel-drive 136 Steptronic transmission 78 Active Cruise Control with Alternating-code hand-held AUTO program, automatic cli‐ Stop & Go, ACC 142 transmitter 171 mate control 164 Active Protection 132 Alternative oil types 217 AUTO program, intensity 164 Active seat, front 58 Animal detection, see Night Auto Start/Stop function 71 Active seat ventilation, Vision 125 Average fuel consumption 96 front 58 Antifreeze, washer fluid 78 Average speed 96 Active Steering, integral 138 Antilock Brake System, Axle loads, weights 241 Adaptive brake assistant 134 ABS 134 Adaptive brake lights, refer to Anti-slip control, refer to B Brake force display 132 DSC 134 Adaptive drive 137 Approved axle load 241 Backrest curvature, refer to Adaptive Light Control 103 Approved engine oils, see Lumbar support 57 Additives, oil 216 Suitable engine oil Backrest, seats 56 Adjusting, steering wheel 65 types 217 Backrest, width 57 Adjustments, seats/head re‐ Armrest, refer to Front center Band-aids, refer to First aid straints 56 armrest 176 kit 228 After washing vehicle 233 Arrival time 97 Bar for tow-starting/ Airbags 107 Ashtray 172 towing 230 Airbags, indicator/warning Assistance when driving Battery replacement, remote light 108 off 134 control for parked-car heat‐ Air circulation, refer to Recir‐ Attentiveness assistant 132 ing/ventilation 169 culated-air mode 165 AUTO H button 73 Battery replacement, vehicle Air, dehumidifying, refer to AUTO H button, refer to Au‐ battery 225 Cooling function 165 tomatic Hold 73 Battery replacement, vehicle Air distribution, manual 164 AUTO intensity 164 remote control 35 Air flow, automatic climate Automatic car wash 232 Battery, vehicle 225 control 164 Automatic Cruise Control Belts, safety belts 59 Air outlets, see ventila‐ with Stop & Go 142 Beverage holder, cu‐ tion 167 Automatic Curb Monitor 63 pholder 177

244 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 245

Everything from A to Z Reference

BMW Assist, see user's Camera, rearview cam‐ Children, transporting manual for Navigation, En‐ era 154 safely 66 tertainment and Communi‐ Camera, Side View 156 Child restraint fixing sys‐ cation Camera, Top View 158 tem 66 BMW Driver’s Guide App 6 Can holder, refer to Cu‐ Child restraint fixing system BMW Homepage 6 pholder 177 LATCH 68 BMW Internet page 6 Car battery 225 Child restraint fixing systems, BMW maintenance sys‐ Car care products 233 mounting 66 tem 220 Care, displays 236 Child seat, mounting 66 Bonus range, ECO PRO 187 Care, vehicle 233 Child seats 66 Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐ Cargo 183 Chrome parts, care 235 pholder 177 Cargo area partition 50 Cigarette lighter 172 Brake assistant 134 Cargo area, storage compart‐ Cleaning displays 236 Brake assistant, adaptive 134 ments 177 Climate control 163 Brake discs, break-in 180 Cargo, securing 184 Climate control wind‐ Brake force display 132 Cargo straps, securing shield 181 Brake lights, adaptive 132 cargo 184 Clock 92 Brake lights, brake force dis‐ Car key, refer to Remote con‐ Closing/opening via door play 132 trol 34 lock 40 Brake lights, bulb replace‐ Carpet, care 235 Closing/opening with remote ment 224 Car wash 232 control 37 Brake pads, break-in 180 Catalytic converter, refer to Clothes hooks 176 Braking, hints 181 Hot exhaust system 181 Coasting 189 Breakdown assistance 227 CBS Condition Based Serv‐ Coasting with engine decou‐ Break-in 180 ice 220 pled, coasting 189 Brightness of Control Dis‐ CD/Multimedia, see user's Coasting with idling en‐ play 99 manual for Navigation, En‐ gine 189 Bulb replacement, front 222 tertainment and Communi‐ Combination reel, refer to Bulb replacement, rear 224 cation Turn signals 75 Button, RES 145 Center console 16 Combination switch, refer to Button, Start/Stop 69 Central locking system 40 Wiper system 76 Bypassing, refer to Jump- Central screen, refer to Con‐ COMFORT+ program, Driving starting 229 trol Display 18 Dynamics Control 140 Changes, technical, refer to Comfort Access 42 C Safety 7 COMFORT program, Driving Changing parts 222 Dynamics Control 140 California Proposition 65 Changing wheels 225 Compressor 208 Warning 7 Changing wheels/tires 206 Computer, refer to On-board Calling up mirror adjust‐ Chassis number, see vehicle computer 96 ment 44 identification number 9 Condensation on win‐ Calling up seat adjust‐ Check Control 87 dows 165 ment 44 Checking the engine oil level Condensation under the vehi‐ Calling up steering wheel ad‐ electronically 215 cle 182 justment 44 Checking the oil level elec‐ Condition Based Service Camera lenses, care 236 tronically 215 CBS 220 Children, seating position 66 Configure driving mode 141

245 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 246

Reference Everything from A to Z

Confirmation signal 44 Cruise control, active with Doors, Automatic Soft Clos‐ ConnectedDrive, see user's Stop & Go 142 ing 41 manual for Navigation, En‐ Cruise Control, refer to Active Downhill control 136 tertainment and Communi‐ Cruise Control 142 Drive-off assistant 134 cation Cruising range 92 Drive-off assistant, refer to ConnectedDrive Services Cupholder 177 DSC 134 Continued driving with a flat Current fuel consumption 92 Driver assistance, refer to In‐ tire 113, 116 telligent Safety 116 Control Display 18 D Driving Assistant, refer to In‐ Control Display, settings 98 telligent Safety 116 Controller 18 Damage, tires 206 Driving Dynamics Con‐ Control systems, driving sta‐ Damping control, dy‐ trol 138 bility 134 namic 137 Driving instructions, break- Convenient closing with the Data, technical 240 in 180 remote control 38 Date 92 Driving mode 138 Convenient opening with the Daytime running lights 103 Driving notes, general 180 remote control 37 Defrosting, refer to Windows, Driving stability control sys‐ Convertible, convertible defrosting 165 tems 134 top 48 Dehumidifying, air 165 Driving tips 180 Convertible mode, automatic Deleting personal data 24 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ climate control 164 Deletion of personal data 24 trol 134 Convertible program, auto‐ Destination distance 97 DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐ matic climate control 164 Digital clock 92 trol 135 Convertible top 48 Dimensions 240 Dynamic Damping Con‐ Convertible top, care 234 Dimmable exterior mirrors 64 trol 137 Convertible top, cargo area Dimmable interior rearview Dynamic Drive 137 partition 50 mirror 64 Dynamic Stability Control Convertible top, emergency Direction indicator, refer to DSC 134 operation 50 Turn signals 75 Dynamic Traction Control Convertible top, rollover pro‐ Display, electronic, instru‐ DTC 135 tection system 110 ment cluster 83 Convertible top tool 50 Display in windshield 99 E Coolant 218 Display lighting, refer to In‐ Coolant level 218 strument lighting 105 ECO PRO 186 Coolant temperature 91 Displays 84 ECO PRO, bonus range 187 Cooling function 165 Displays, cleaning 236 ECO PRO display 186 Cooling, maximum 165 Disposal, coolant 219 ECO PRO displays 85 Cooling system 218 Disposal, vehicle battery 226 ECO PRO driving mode 186 Cornering light 103 Distance control, refer to ECO PRO mode 186 Corrosion on brake discs 182 PDC 151 ECO PRO Tip - driving in‐ Cosmetic mirror 172 Distance to destination 97 struction 188 Courtesy lamps during un‐ Divided screen view, split EfficientDynamics 188 locking 37 screen 23 Electronic displays, instru‐ Courtesy lamps with the vehi‐ Door lock 40 ment cluster 83 cle locked 38 Door lock, refer to Remote Electronic oil measure‐ Cruise control 149 control 34 ment 215

246 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 247

Everything from A to Z Reference

Electronic Stability Program Entering/exiting vehicle, as‐ Front-end collision warning ESP, refer to DSC 134 sistance, steering wheel 65 with braking function 118 Emergency detection, remote Entering a car wash 232 Front-end collision warning control 35 Equipment, interior 170 with City Braking func‐ Emergency operation, Error displays, see Check tion 120 convertible top 50 Control 87 Front fog lights 105 Emergency release, fuel filler ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐ Front fog lights, bulb replace‐ flap 194 gram, refer to DSC 134 ment 224 Emergency Request 227 Exchanging wheels/tires 206 Front lights 222 Emergency start function, en‐ Exhaust system 181 front-seat passenger airbags, gine start 35 Exterior mirror, automatic automatic deactivation 109 Emergency unlocking, trans‐ dimming feature 64 Front-seat passenger airbags, mission lock 81 Exterior mirrors 63 indicator lamp 109 Emergency unlocking, trunk External start 229 Front seats 56 lid 42 External temperature dis‐ FTM Flat Tire Monitor 114 Energy Control 92 play 91 Fuel 196 Energy recovery 93 External temperature warn‐ Fuel consumption, refer to Engine, automatic Start/Stop ing 91 Average fuel consump‐ function 71 Eyes for securing cargo 184 tion 96 Engine, automatic switch- Fuel filler flap 194 off 71 F Fuel gauge 91 Engine compartment 213 Fuel lid 194 Engine compartment, work‐ Failure message, see Check Fuel quality 196 ing in 213 Control 87 Fuel recommendation 196 Engine coolant 218 False alarm, refer to Uninten‐ Fuel, tank capacity 242 Engine idling when driving, tional alarm 45 Fuse 226 coasting 189 Fan, refer to Air flow 164 Engine oil 215 Filler neck for engine oil 216 G Engine oil, adding 216 Fine wood, care 235 Engine oil additives 216 First aid kit 228 Garage door opener, refer to Engine oil change 217 Fitting for towing, see Tow fit‐ Universal Integrated Remote Engine oil filler neck 216 ting 231 Control 170 Engine oil temperature 91 Flat tire, changing Gasoline 196 Engine oil types, alterna‐ wheels 225 Gear change, Steptronic tive 217 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 114 transmission 79 Engine oil types, ap‐ Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐ Gear shift indicator 94 proved 217 tor TPM 111 General driving notes 180 Engine start during malfunc‐ Flat tire, warning Glare shield 172 tion 35 lamp 112, 115 Glove compartment 175 Engine start, jump-start‐ Flooding 181 Gross vehicle weight, ap‐ ing 229 Floor carpet, care 235 proved 241 Engine start, refer to Starting Floor mats, care 235 the engine 70 Fold-out position, wiper 77 H Engine stop 70 Foot brake 181 Engine temperature 91 Front airbags 107 Handbrake, refer to Parking Front center armrest 176 brake 72

247 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 248

Reference Everything from A to Z

Hand-held transmitter, alter‐ I Intelligent Emergency Re‐ nating code 171 quest 227 Hazard warning flashers 227 Ice warning, see External Intelligent Safety 116 HDC Hill Descent Con‐ temperature warning 91 Intensity, AUTO pro‐ trol 136 Icy roads, see External tem‐ gram 164 Headlight control, auto‐ perature warning 91 Interior equipment 170 matic 103 Identification marks, tires 204 Interior lights 105 Headlight courtesy delay fea‐ Identification number, see ve‐ Interior lights during unlock‐ ture 103 hicle identification num‐ ing 37 Headlight courtesy delay fea‐ ber 9 Interior lights with the vehicle ture via remote control 39 iDrive 18 locked 38 Headlight flasher 76 Ignition key, refer to Remote Interior motion sensor 45 Headlight glass 223 control 34 Interior rearview mirror, auto‐ Headlights 222 Ignition off 69 matic dimming feature 64 Headlights, care 233 Ignition on 69 Internet page 6 Headlight washer system 76 Indication of a flat Interval display, service re‐ Head restraints 56 tire 112, 115 quirements 93 Head restraints, front 60 Indicator and alarm lamps, Interval mode 76 Head-up Display 99 see Check Control 87 Head-up Display, care 236 Indicator lamp, see Check J Heating, refer to Parked-car Control 87 heating 167 Individual air distribution 164 Jacking points for the vehicle Heavy cargo, stowing 184 Individual settings, refer to jack 225 Height, seats 56 Personal Profile 35 Joystick, Steptronic transmis‐ Height, vehicle 240 Inflation pressure, tires 198 sion 79 High-beam Assistant 104 Inflation pressure warning Jump-starting 229 High beams 76 FTM, tires 114 High beams/low beams, refer Info display, refer to On- K to High-beam Assistant 104 Board computer 96 Hill Descent Control Initialization, Integral Active Key/remote control 34 HDC 136 Steering 138 Keyless Go, refer to Comfort Hills 182 Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐ Access 42 Hill start assistant, refer to tor TPM 112 Key Memory, refer to Per‐ Drive-off assistant 134 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor sonal Profile 35 Hints 6 FTM 115 Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐ Holder for beverages 177 Instrument cluster 83 mission 79 Homepage 6 Instrument cluster, electronic Knee airbag 107 Hood 213 displays 83 Horn 14 Instrument display, multifunc‐ L Hotel function, trunk lid 41 tional 84 Hot exhaust system 181 Instrument lighting 105 Lamp replacement, front 222 HUD Head-up Display 99 Integral Active Steering 138 Lamp replacement, rear 224 Hydroplaning 181 Integrated key 34 Lane departure warning 129 Integrated Owner's Manual in Lane margin, warning 129 the vehicle 29 Language on Control Dis‐ play 99

248 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 249

Everything from A to Z Reference

Lashing eyes, securing Maintenance require‐ Menus, operating, iDrive 18 cargo 184 ments 220 Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐ LATCH child restraint sys‐ Maintenance, service require‐ ing concept 19 tem 68 ments 93 Messages, see Check Con‐ Launch Control 81 Maintenance system, trol 87 Leather, care 234 BMW 220 Microfilter 166 LED front fog lights, bulb re‐ Make-up mirror 172 Minimum tread, tires 206 placement 224 Malfunction displays, see Mirror 63 LED headlights, bulb replace‐ Check Control 87 Mirror memory 62 ment 223 Manual air distribution 164 Mobile communication devi‐ LED light 223 Manual air flow 164 ces in the vehicle 181 LEDs, light-emitting di‐ Manual brake, refer to Parking Mobility System 208 odes 223 brake 72 Modifications, technical, refer Length, vehicle 240 Manual mode, Steptronic to Safety 7 Letters and numbers, enter‐ transmission 80 Moisture in headlight 223 ing 24 Manual operation, door Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐ License plate lamp, bulb re‐ lock 40 play 18 placement 224 Manual operation, exterior Mounting of child restraint Light alloy wheels, care 235 mirrors 63 systems 66 Light control 103 Manual operation, fuel filler Multifunctional instrument Light-emitting diodes, flap 194 display 84 LEDs 223 Manual operation, Park Dis‐ Multifunction steering wheel, Lighting 102 tance Control PDC 152 buttons 14 Lighting, speaker 106 Manual operation, rearview Lights 102 camera 154 N Lights and bulbs 222 Manual operation, Side Light switch 102 View 156 Navigation, see user's manual Load 184 Manual operation, Top for Navigation, Entertain‐ Loading 183 View 158 ment and Communication Lock, door 40 Marking on approved Neck restraints, front, refer to Locking/unlocking via door tires 207 Head restraints 60 lock 40 Marking, run-flat tires 208 Neutral cleaner, see wheel Locking/unlocking with re‐ Massage seat, front 58 cleaner 235 mote control 37 Master key, refer to Remote New wheels and tires 206 Locking, automatic 44 control 34 Night Vision 125 Locking, settings 43 Maximum cooling 165 Night Vision device, see Night Locking via trunk lid 41 Maximum speed, display 94 Vision 125 Low beams 102 Maximum speed, winter Nylon rope for tow-starting/ Low beams, automatic, refer tires 207 towing 230 to High-beam Assistant 104 Measure, units of 99 Lower back support 57 Medical kit 228 O Lumbar support 57 Memory for seat, mirrors, steering wheel 62 OBD Onboard Diagnosis 221 M Menu, EfficientDynamics 188 OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐ Menu in instrument clus‐ agnosis 221 Maintenance 220 ter 95

249 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 250

Reference Everything from A to Z

Object detection, see Night Parked vehicle, condensa‐ Radio, see user's manual for Vision 125 tion 182 Navigation, Entertainment Obstacle marking, rearview Parking aid, refer to PDC 151 and Communication camera 155 Parking assistant 159 Rain sensor 76 Octane rating, refer to Rec‐ Parking brake 72 Rear axle steering 138 ommended fuel grade 196 Parking lights 102 Rear lights 224 Odometer 91 Parking with Automatic Rearview camera 153 Office, see user's manual for Hold 73 Rearview mirror 63 Navigation, Entertainment Parts and accessories 7 Rear window defroster 165 and Communication Passenger side mirror, tilting Recirculated-air mode 165 Oil 215 downward 63 Recommended fuel Oil, adding 216 Pathway lines, rearview cam‐ grade 196 Oil additives 216 era 154 Recommended tire Oil change 217 PDC Park Distance Con‐ brands 207 Oil change interval, service trol 151 Refueling 194 requirements 93 Pedestrian detection, see Remaining range 92 Oil filler neck 216 Night Vision 125 Remote control/key 34 Oil types, alternative 217 Pedestrian warning with city Remote control, malfunc‐ Oil types, approved 217 braking function 123 tion 39 Old batteries, disposal 226 Personal Profile 35 Remote control, parked-car On-board computer 96 Personal Profile, exporting heating/ventilation 168 Onboard monitor, refer to profiles 36 Remote control, univer‐ Control Display 18 Pinch protection system, win‐ sal 170 Onboard vehicle tool kit 222 dows 47 Replacement fuse 226 Opening/closing via door Plastic, care 235 Replacing bulbs, see Lamp lock 40 Power failure 226 replacement 222 Opening and closing 34 Power windows 46 Replacing parts 222 Opening and closing, without Pressure, tire air pres‐ Replacing wheels/tires 206 remote control 40 sure 198 Reporting safety defects 9 Opening and closing, with re‐ Pressure warning FTM, RES button 145 mote control 37 tires 114 RES button, see Active Operating concept, iDrive 18 Profile, refer to Personal Pro‐ Cruise Control, ACC 142 Optional equipment, standard file 35 RES button, see Cruise con‐ equipment 6 Programmable memory but‐ trol 149 Outside air, refer to Auto‐ tons, iDrive 23 Reserve warning, refer to matic recirculated-air con‐ Protective function, win‐ Range 92 trol 165 dows 47 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor Overheating of engine, refer Push-and-turn switch, refer to TPM 112 to Coolant temperature 91 Controller 18 Residual heat, automatic cli‐ mate control 166 P R Retaining straps, securing cargo 184 Paint, vehicle 233 Radiator fluid 218 Retreaded tires 207 Parallel parking assistant 159 Radio-operated key, refer to Reversing lamp, bulb replace‐ Park Distance Control Remote control 34 ment 224 PDC 151 Radio ready state 69 Roadside parking lights 103

250 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 251

Everything from A to Z Reference

Rollover protection sys‐ Seat ventilation, front 58 Speed limit detection, on- tem 110 Selection list in instrument board computer 97 Roll stabilization, refer to cluster 95 Speed limiter, display 94 Adaptive Drive 137 Selector lever, Steptronic Speed Limit Information 94 Roll stabilization, refer to Dy‐ transmission 79 Speed warning 97 namic Drive 137 Sensors, care 236 Split screen 23 RON recommended fuel Service and warranty 8 SPORT+ - program, Dynamic grade 196 Service requirements, Condi‐ Driving Control 140 Rope for tow-starting/ tion Based Service Sport displays, torque dis‐ towing 230 CBS 220 play, performance dis‐ RSC Run Flat System Com‐ Service requirements, dis‐ play 97 ponent, refer to Run-flat play 93 SPORT program, driving dy‐ tires 208 Services, ConnectedDrive namics 140 Rubber components, SET button, see Active Sport program, transmis‐ care 235 Cruise Control, ACC 142 sion 80 Run-flat tires 208 SET button, see Cruise con‐ Stability control systems 134 trol 149 Start/stop, automatic func‐ S Settings, locking/unlock‐ tion 71 ing 43 Start/Stop button 69 Safe braking 181 Settings on Control Dis‐ Start function during malfunc‐ Safety 7 play 98 tion 35 Safety belt reminder for driv‐ Settings, storing for seat, mir‐ Starting the engine 70 er's seat and front passen‐ rors, steering wheel 62 Status control display, ger seat 60 Shift paddles on the steering tires 111 Safety belts 59 wheel 80 Status information, iDrive 22 Safety belts, care 235 Shift point indicator 86 Status of Owner's Manual 7 Safety Package, refer to Ac‐ Shoulder support 58 Steering, Integral Active tive Protection 132 Side airbags 107 Steering 138 Safety systems, airbags 107 Side View 156 Steering wheel, adjusting 64 Saving fuel 185 Signaling, horn 14 Steering wheel heating 65 Screen, refer to Control Dis‐ Signals when unlocking 44 Steering wheel memory 62 play 18 Sitting safely 56 Steptronic Sport transmis‐ Screwdriver, see Onboard ve‐ Size 240 sion, refer to Steptronic hicle tool kit 222 Ski bag 174 transmission 78 Screw thread, refer to Screw Smallest turning radius 240 Steptronic transmission 78 thread for tow fitting, screw Smoker's package 172 Stopping the engine 70 thread for tow fitting 231 Snow chains 211 Storage compartments 175 Sealant 208 Socket 173 Storage compartments, loca‐ Seat belts, refer to Safety Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐ tions 175 belts 59 nostics 221 Storage, tires 208 Seat heating, front 58 SOS button 227 Storing the vehicle 236 Seating position for chil‐ Spare fuse 226 Suitable engine oils 217 dren 66 Speaker lighting 106 Summer tires, tread 205 Seat, mirror, and steering Specified engine oil Sun visor 172 wheel memory 62 types 217 Supplementary text mes‐ Seats 56 Speed, average 96 sage 90

251 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 252

Reference Everything from A to Z

Surround View 153 Tire inflation pressure moni‐ Trunk lid via remote con‐ Suspension settings 138 tor, refer to FTM 114 trol 39 Switch for Dynamic Driving Tire Pressure Monitor Turning circle 240 Control 138 TPM 111 Turning circle lines, rearview Switch-on times, parked-car Tires, changing 206 camera 155 heating 168 Tire sealant 208 Turn signals, operation 75 Switch-on times, parked-car Tires, everything on wheels Turn signals, rear, bulb re‐ ventilation 168 and tires 198 placement 224 Switch, refer to Cockpit 14 Tires, run-flat tires 208 Symbols 6 Tire tread 205 U Symbols in the status field 22 Tone, see user's manual for SYNC program, automatic cli‐ Navigation, Entertainment Unintentional alarm 45 mate control 166 and Communication Units of measure 99 Tool 222 Universal remote control 170 T Top View 157 Unlock button, Steptronic Total vehicle weight 241 transmission 79 Tachometer 91 Touchpad 21 Unlocking/locking via door Tail and brake lights 224 Tow fitting 231 lock 40 Tail lights 224 Towing 230 Unlocking/locking with re‐ Tail lights, bulb replace‐ Tow lug, see Tow fitting 231 mote control 37 ment 224 Tow-starting 230 Unlocking, settings 43 Technical changes, refer to TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐ Updates made after the edito‐ Safety 7 tor 111 rial deadline 7 Technical data 240 Traction control 135 Upholstery care 234 Telephone, see user's manual TRACTION, driving dynam‐ USB interface 175 for Navigation, Entertain‐ ics 135 ment and Communication TRACTION program, Dy‐ V Temperature, automatic cli‐ namic Driving Control 139 mate control 164 Transmission lock, electronic Vanity mirror 172 Temperature display for ex‐ unlocking 81 Variable steering, Integral Ac‐ ternal temperature 91 Transmission, see Steptronic tive Steering 138 Temperature, engine oil 91 transmission 78 Vehicle battery 225 Terminal, starting aid 229 Transporting children Vehicle battery, replac‐ Text message, supplemen‐ safely 66 ing 225 tary 90 Tread, tires 205 Vehicle, break-in 180 Theft alarm system, refer to Trip computer 97 Vehicle care 233 Alarm system 44 Triple turn signal activa‐ Vehicle features and op‐ Thermal camera, see Night tion 75 tions 6 Vision 125 Trip odometer 91 Vehicle identification num‐ Thigh support 57 Trunk, cargo area partition 50 ber 9 Tilt alarm sensor 45 Trunk lid closing 41 Vehicle jack 225 Tilt, seats 56 Trunk lid, emergency unlock‐ Vehicle paint 233 Time of arrival 97 ing 42 Vehicle storage 236 Tire damage 206 Trunk lid, hotel function 41 Vehicle wash 232 Tire identification marks 204 Trunk lid opening 41 Ventilation 167 Tire inflation pressure 198 Venting, see ventilation 167

252 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15 Seite 253

Everything from A to Z Reference

Vent, see ventilation 167 Winter storage, care 236 VIN, see vehicle identification Winter tires, suitable number 9 tires 207 Voice activation system 26 Winter tires, tread 205 Wiper 76 W Wiper blades, replacing 222 Wiper fluid 78 Warning and indicator lamps, Wiper, fold-out position 77 see Check Control 87 Wiper system 76 Warning displays, see Check Wood, care 235 Control 87 Word match concept, naviga‐ Warning messages, see tion 24 Check Control 87 Wrench, see Onboard vehicle Warning triangle 228 tool kit 222 Warranty 7 Washer fluid 78 X Washer nozzles, wind‐ shield 77 xDrive 136 Washer system 76 Washing, vehicle 232 Water on roads 181 Weights 241 Welcome lamps during un‐ locking 37 Welcome lights 102 Wheel base, vehicle 240 Wheel cleaner 235 Wheels, changing 206 Wheels, everything on wheels and tires 198 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 114 Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor TPM 111 Width, vehicle 240 Wind deflector 54 Window defroster, rear 165 Windows, powered 46 Windshield, climate con‐ trol 181 Windshield washer fluid 78 Windshield washer noz‐ zles 77 Windshield washer sys‐ tem 76 Windshield wiper 76

253 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15

More about BMW

The Ultimate bmwusa.com Driving Machine® 01 40 2 954 418 ue

*BL295441800H*

Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 954 418 - II/15